Attached files

file filename
EX-23.1 - EXHIBIT 23.1 - Vislink Technologies, Inc.v373560_ex23-1.htm

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 3, 2014

Registration No. 333-194810

 

UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549



 

FORM S-1
Amendment No. 1
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933



 

xG Technology, Inc.

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)



 

   
Delaware   519100   20-585-6795
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
  (Primary Standard Industrial
Classification Code Number)
  (I.R.S. Employer
Identification No.)

John C. Coleman
xG Technology, Inc.
240 S. Pineapple Avenue, Suite 701
Sarasota, FL 34236
(941) 953-9035

(Address, including zip code, and telephone number,
including area code, of registrant’s principal executive offices)



 

The Company Corporation
2711 Centerville Road
Wilmington, DE 19808
(800) 474-8135

(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number,
including area code, of agent for service)



 

Copy to:

 
David E. Danovitch, Esq.
Avraham S. Adler, Esq.
Robinson Brog Leinwand Greene
Genovese & Gluck P.C.
875 Third Avenue — 9th Floor
New York, New York 10022
(212) 603-6300
  Christopher M. Forrester, Esq.
Celeste S. Ferber, Esq.
Shearman & Sterling LLP
5 Palo Alto Square — 6th Floor
3000 El Camino Real
Palo Alto, California 94306
(650) 838-3600


 

Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public: Upon after the effective date of this Registration Statement.

If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box. o

If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering. o

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering. o

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering. o

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company.

 
Large Accelerated Filer o   Accelerated Filer o
Non-Accelerated Filer o   Smaller Reporting Company x
 

 


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

   
Title of Each Class of Securities to be Registered   Proposed Maximum
Aggregate
Offering Price(1)(2)
  Amount of
Registration
Fee(4)
Common Stock, $0.00001 par value per share(3)   $ 11,500,000     $ 1,481.20  
TOTAL   $ 11,500,000     $ 1,481.20  

(1) Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the registration fee pursuant to Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”).
(2) In accordance with Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act, the number of shares of common stock being registered and the proposed maximum offering price per share are not included in this table. Includes the offering price of additional shares that the underwriters have the option to purchase from the Registrant to cover over-allotments, if any.
(3) Pursuant to Rule 416 under the Securities Act, the shares of common stock registered hereby also include an indeterminate number of additional shares as may from time to time become issuable by reason of stock splits, stock dividends, recapitalizations or other similar transactions.
(4) Previously paid.

Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with section 8(A) of the Securities Act or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the commission, acting pursuant to said section 8(A), may determine.


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The information in this prospectus is not complete and may be changed. We may not sell these securities until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and it is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted.

SUBJECT TO COMPLETION

PRELIMINARY PROSPECTUS
Dated April 3, 2014

            Shares

[GRAPHIC MISSING]

Common Stock


This is a firm commitment public offering of         shares of common stock of xG Technology, Inc.

Currently, our common stock is traded on the NASDAQ Capital Market under the symbol “XGTI”. The closing price of our shares on NASDAQ on March 31, 2014 was $2.74 per share.

We are an “emerging growth company” as the term is used in the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012 (the “JOBS Act”) and, as such, have elected to comply with certain reduced public company reporting requirements for this and future filings.


Investing in our common stock involves a high degree of risk. See “Risk Factors” beginning on page 10 of this prospectus for a discussion that should be considered in connection with an investment in our common stock.


Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if the prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.


   
     Per Share   Total
Public offering price   $            $         
Underwriting discounts(1)   $     $  
Offering proceeds to us, before expenses   $     $  
(1) The underwriters will receive compensation in addition to the underwriting discount. See “Underwriting.”

We have granted a 45-day option to the underwriters to purchase up to        additional shares of common stock.

The underwriters expect to deliver our securities to purchasers in the offering on or about             , 2014.


Sole Book-Running Lead Manager

Roth Capital Partners


Co-Manager

Feltl and Company

The date of this prospectus is            , 2014


 
 


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 
  Page
Summary     1  
The Offering     6  
Summary Financial Data     8  
Risk Factors     10  
Cautionary Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements     28  
Use of Proceeds     29  
Dividend Policy     29  
Capitalization     30  
Market Price Information for Our Securities     31  
Dilution     32  
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations     34  
Business     42  
Management     62  
Executive Compensation     69  
Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management     73  
Certain Relationships and Related Transactions     75  
Description of Securities     79  
Shares Eligible for Future Sale     82  
Underwriting     84  
Legal Matters     90  
Experts     90  
Where You Can More Additional Information     90  
Index to Financial Statements     F-1  
Glossary     G-1  

You should rely only on the information contained in this prospectus. Neither we nor the underwriters have authorized anyone to provide you with information that is different. Neither we nor the underwriters are making an offer to sell these securities in any jurisdiction where an offer or sale is not permitted. You should assume that the information appearing in this prospectus is accurate as of the date on the front cover of this prospectus only. Our business, prospects, financial condition and results of operations may have changed since that date.

Information contained in, and that can be accessed through, our web site, www.xgtechnology.com, does not constitute part of this prospectus.

The xG logo is a trademark of xG Technology, Inc. All other trademarks and service marks appearing in this prospectus are the property of their respective holders.

This prospectus includes market and industry data that has been obtained from third party sources, including industry publications, as well as industry data prepared by our management on the basis of its knowledge of and experience in the industries in which we operate (including our management’s estimates and assumptions relating to such industries based on that knowledge). Management’s knowledge of such industries has been developed through its experience and participation in these industries. While our management believes the third-party sources referred to in this prospectus are reliable, neither we nor our management have independently verified any of the data from such sources referred to in this prospectus or ascertained the underlying economic assumptions relied

i


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

upon by such sources. Internally prepared and third party market forecasts, in particular, are estimates only and may be inaccurate, especially over long periods of time. In addition, the underwriters have not independently verified any of the industry data prepared by management or ascertained the underlying estimates and assumptions relied upon by management. Furthermore, references in this prospectus to any publications, reports, surveys or articles prepared by third parties should not be construed as depicting the complete findings of the entire publication, report, survey or article. The information in any such publication, report, survey or article is not incorporated by reference in this prospectus.

ii


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUMMARY

This summary highlights selected information contained in greater detail elsewhere in this prospectus. This summary does not contain all the information you should consider before investing in our common stock. You should read the entire prospectus carefully before making an investment decision, especially “Risk Factors” and the financial statements and the related notes. Unless the context provides otherwise, all references herein to “xG”, “xG Technology”, the “Company”, “we”, “our” and “us” refer to xG Technology, Inc. For definitions of certain industry terms used throughout this prospectus, please see “Glossary”.

Our Company

We have developed a broad portfolio of innovative intellectual property to enhance wireless communications. Our intellectual property is embedded in proprietary software algorithms that offer cognitive interference mitigation and spectrum access solutions for countless applications using commercial off the shelf devices. We recently released the commercially available version of our software and hardware products using our proprietary xMax® cognitive radio technology.

Our current cognitive radio technology is based on years of product development. In 2008 and 2009, we generated material revenues from sales of our prior BSN250 voice-only products. After the introduction of various smartphones in 2007 and later that could handle both voice and data, we decided to enhance our voice-only products to include data services. In 2011, we delivered our enhanced BSN250 base station and TX70 handset for both voice and SMS services to the U.S. Army. Given the proliferation of smartphones, the U.S. Army subsequently requested that our BSN250 base station should integrate with commercial off the shelf devices. In 2013, we introduced an improved product line that could handle both voice and data services. These new products, the xAP base station and xMod and xVM modems, are able to communicate with any wi-fi enabled commercial off the shelf device. We have generated significant net losses for the past several years and we expect to continue to realize net losses for the immediate future. We estimate that we will begin generating revenues sufficient to cover the cost of our operations in late 2014.

We believe that the wireless communications industry is facing a “spectrum crisis” because the demand for flexible, affordable voice and data access continues to increase rapidly while the amount of available spectrum remains relatively constant. We have developed frequency-agnostic cognitive radio solutions to address this increasing demand by eliminating the need to acquire scarce and expensive licensed radio spectrum, and thus ideally lowering the total cost of ownership for wireless broadband access. With fast-growing demand straining network capacity, our intellectual property is also designed to help wireless broadband network operators make more efficient use of their existing spectrum allocations. We are targeting sales in numerous industries worldwide, such as telecommunications services, public safety and defense, and in markets ranging from rural to urban areas as well as expeditionary deployments.

The initial implementation of our cognitive radio intellectual property is xMax. We believe the xMax system is the only commercially available cognitive radio network system that includes our interference mitigation and spatial processing technologies. xMax implements our proprietary interference mitigation software that can increase capacity on already crowded airwaves by improving interference tolerance, enabling the delivery of higher Quality of Service (“QoS”) than other technologies that would not be able to cope with the interference. We believe that the xMax system will also, when operating on more than one radio channel, deliver dynamic spectrum access by using our patented self-organizing network techniques. Furthermore, the xMax system can be used to provide additional capacity to licensed spectrum by identifying and utilizing unused bandwidth within the licensed spectrum.

Our system is frequency agnostic, although currently designed to operate within the 902 – 928 MHz unlicensed band of spectrum. xMax serves as a mobile voice over internet protocol (“VoIP”) and broadband data system that utilizes an end-to-end Internet Protocol (“IP”) system architecture. The xMax product and service suite includes access points, mobile switching centers, network management systems, deployment tools and proactive customer support. The xMax system will allow mobile operators to utilize free, unlicensed 902 – 928 MHz ISM band spectrum (which spectrum is available in all of the Americas except French Guiana) instead of purchasing scarce and expensive licensed spectrum. Our xMax system will also enable enterprises to set up a mobile communications network in an expeditious and cost-effective manner.

1


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The diagram below provides a high-level overview of the xMax® network architecture:

[GRAPHIC MISSING]

We are executing on our sales and marketing strategy and have entered into direct sales agreements with end-customers and indirect sales agreements with channel network partners. These customer engagements are primarily in two of our target markets: public safety and rural telecommunications. Together, they comprise commitments to purchase xMax® cognitive radio networking equipment, engineering and support services and other hardware worth approximately $34.6 million, of which the Company anticipates approximately $17.6 million to be delivered in 2014 and $17 million thereafter.

As of the date of this prospectus, 39.70% of the shares of our common stock are beneficially owned by MB Technology Holdings, LLC (“MBTH”). MBTH was co-founded in 2010 by Rick Mooers, Roger Branton and George Schmitt in order to invest in, and provide expertise, guidance and other support to, us. Roger Branton, our Chief Financial Officer, and George Schmitt, our Executive Chairman, are directors of MBTH, and Richard Mooers, a director of our Company, is the CEO and a director of MBTH. MB Merchant Group, LLC (“MBMG”), a merchant bank owned by family entities or trusts related to Richard Mooers and Roger Branton, has a 45.23% ownership interest in MBTH as of March 31, 2014. George Schmitt has a direct 36.34% ownership interest in MBTH as of March 31, 2014, and has been granted an option to purchase MBTH shares sufficient to give him an additional 5% ownership interest in MBTH. Since its founding, MBTH has provided xG Technology with significant financial and other support, including $7.8 million of indebtedness under the promissory note issued by us to MBTH pursuant to a subscription agreement dated January 16, 2013 (together, the “Bridge Loan”). On July 18, 2013, MBTH, along with other investors, exchanged the outstanding Bridge Loan for 2,187,529 shares of our common stock and warrants to purchase an additional 1,093,778 shares, in full satisfaction of the Bridge Loan. For further details on the financial support given by MBTH to us and other transactions and arrangements between us and MBTH, please see the section entitled “Related Party Transactions — Other Transactions”.

Our Strengths

We believe the following strengths position us for sustainable growth:

Our proprietary xMax® cognitive radio technology.  We have developed our xMax cognitive radio technology to create a turnkey network solution. This solution encompasses the key elements of our cognitive technology, including spectrum sensing, spectrum management, spectrum mobility, spectrum sharing and spatial processing. Our software and hardware products and our end-to-end IP architecture implement this solution to provide quality VoIP and data services for countless applications and commercial off the shelf devices.
Our technology addresses an expanding market need.  Our market opportunity has accelerated and expanded due to the spectrum crisis and the stated goals of governmental organizations to increase

2


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

spectrum access. Our cognitive technology allows mobile wireless networks to provide quality voice and data services using unlicensed spectrum, and our interference mitigation and spatial processing techniques enable these services even in crowded or shared spectrum bands. Rural telecommunication providers, public safety agencies, industrial and enterprise users, and those who use unlicensed spectrum can use our products and services to create wireless networks without the significant capital outlays and delays required to license spectrum.
Our solutions meet the specific needs of targeted markets.  Our cognitive radio technology has been specifically developed to make our entire network infrastructure mobile, so that it can be rapidly deployed in response to public safety or security threats. We believe this feature differentiates our technology from that of our competitors and will address a major capability gap for public safety, defense, homeland security and news agencies. In addition, the expanded range of our network can provide improved voice and data services for underserved rural markets.
We have a broad patent portfolio and unencumbered use of our intellectual property.  We maintain a broad patent portfolio consisting of patents and patent applications in the United States and many international jurisdictions, which include 49 issued U.S. patents and 64 issued international patents. We have solely funded the development of our intellectual property, which is, accordingly, unencumbered by any federal government unlimited use licenses.
We have an accomplished leadership team.  Our management team and board of directors brings a wealth of experience in the telecommunications and military sectors as well as hardware and software development. Our engineering team has a strong track record developing ad-hoc networking domains at Motorola and Mesh Networks. In addition, most of our leadership team has strong ties to our target markets, including public safety organizations, rural telecommunications companies and the military.

Our Strategy

We are developing a broad portfolio of innovative intellectual property that we believe will enhance wireless communications. Leveraging elements of this intellectual property portfolio, we plan to introduce a range of spectrum agnostic, cognitive radio solutions for numerous industries and applications. We believe that sales of these products and services, together with our ability to leverage our patent portfolio, present us with an attractive revenue model. Our current strategy is to commercialize our intellectual property portfolio by developing and selling network products using our proprietary software algorithms to offer cognitive interference mitigation and spectrum access solutions. Our future strategies are for our intellectual property to be embedded by partners in a semiconductor chip that could be sold to third-party equipment manufacturers and inserted in their devices, and to license our intellectual property to other customers in industry verticals world-wide.

Recent Developments

On March 7, 2014, we announced that the General Available (“GA”) release of xMax was ready for delivery. The GA release of xMax cognitive radio software optimizes numerous features and enhancements in the xMax system that support high performance spectrum sharing. It features extensions to our key enabling technologies, including dynamic spectrum access (“DSA”), interference mitigation, full mobile handoff and software defined radio (“SDR”) capabilities. We are providing the GA system software to existing customers free of charge, and it will be included with all future shipments.

Market Overview

Our management believes that we are witnessing rapidly increasing demand in the marketplace for mobile bandwidth. The surge in demand is attributable to the proliferation of smartphones, tablet PCs and other broadband-centric devices, as well as the shift to data and video-intensive services. A Cisco report (the Cisco Visual Networking Index, February 2012) indicates that in 2011 more than 50% of the data traffic on mobile networks was video, and they forecast video traffic to account for over 70% of total mobile data traffic by 2016.

There has also been an increase in mobile voice demand as more people unplug their wired phones and rely on wireless devices for all of their calling needs. According to Cisco’s report, as well as several studies

3


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

undertaken by the Federal Communications Commission (“FCC”), the demand for wireless services will continue to grow in the coming years. Cisco predicts mobile data traffic will increase 18-fold between 2011 and 2016, a 78% compounded annual growth rate (“CAGR”), reaching 10.8 billion gigabytes per month.

Unlike fiber based telecommunications services, where technology has been able to increase bandwidth at a rate faster than the increase in traffic growth, radio frequency has limitations that technology alone cannot overcome. To address the increased spectrum scarcity, the FCC has pledged to “source” 500 MHz of additional spectrum within the next 10 years (FCC Mobile Broadband Report, 2010). In July 2012, the US President’s Council of Advisors on Science and Technology (“PCAST”) reported to Congress with proposals on the next steps to respond to the mandate to clear the 500MHz of spectrum for commercial use. The report noted that simply clearing and reallocating spectrum would not be sustainable and pointed to a recent study by the National Telecommunications and Information Administration (“NTIA”) which found that clearing just one 95 MHz band will take 10 years, cost $18 billion, and cause significant disruption. Among the NTIA’s key recommendations are to adopt new technologies, including cognitive radios, that could help use existing spectrum more efficiently, stating that “the use of new radio technologies, including cognitive radios, will be an important tool in helping increase spectrum capacity and utilization”. The PCAST authors stated that agile (cognitive) radio technologies that make it possible for computerized radio systems to share spectrum on a vastly more efficient basis would make it possible to move from an era of scarcity to one of abundance.

Spectrum scarcity is not limited to the United States. In September 2012, the European Commission published a communication promoting the shared use of radio spectrum resources. A study conducted for the European Commission showed that finding additional shared spectrum resources for wireless broadband could create significant net economic benefits for the European Union. With an increase of between 200 to 400 MHz in shared access spectrum for wireless broadband, the scenarios evaluated in the study showed a net increase in the value to the European economy on the order of several hundred billion Euros by 2020. The Commission, therefore, proposed steps to foster the development of wireless innovations in the EU to ensure that the currently allocated spectrum is exploited to the fullest extent possible. This has been followed by Ofcom, the telecommunications regulator in the UK, as it moves to complete the process to release TV Whites Spaces for shared use.

The commercial cellular networks do not represent the only services that are running out of capacity due to spectrum limitations. Wireless users around the globe, such as industrial and enterprise users, public safety agencies and those who use unlicensed spectrum (such as Wi-Fi and TV White Spaces), are demanding more spectrum. However, they are not being allocated the necessary spectrum due to the fact that regulators are under pressure to dedicate more and more spectrum to commercial mobile carriers as the demand for both voice and broadband access continues to increase.

While the currently available spectrum cannot satisfy the future growth of wireless data, we believe that getting more use out of spectrum (both licensed and unlicensed) by sharing it will provide a more effective and efficient solution for the industry than merely demanding more spectrum. We believe that deployment of cognitive radio networks offers the best solution to address the pressing need for more efficient use of spectrum.

Risks That We Face

An investment in our common stock involves a high degree of risk. You should carefully consider the risks summarized below. The risks are discussed more fully in the “Risk Factors” section of this prospectus immediately following this prospectus summary. These risks include, but are not limited to:

we are an early-stage company with a history of losses and we may never achieve sustained profitability;
our business depends upon our ability to generate sustained sales of our products and technology;
we need to establish and maintain effective distribution channels;
our business depends on our ability to continually develop and commercialize wireless technologies and technologies designed to mitigate interference within the wireless spectrum;

4


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

we need to obtain or maintain patents or other appropriate protection for the intellectual property utilized in our technologies;
we will need to compete with companies with larger resources than we have;
we may require additional capital to develop new products; and
new regulations or standards or changes in existing regulations or standards related to our products may result in unanticipated costs or liabilities.

Company Information

The Company was organized as a limited liability company under the laws of the State of Delaware on August 26, 2002 under the name JTS Acquisitions, LLC. On March 21, 2003, we changed our name to xG Technology, LLC. Pursuant to a certificate of conversion and a certificate of incorporation filed with the State of Delaware on November 8, 2006, xG Technology, LLC converted to a Delaware corporation under the name xG Technology, Inc. Our executive offices are located at 240 S. Pineapple Avenue, Suite 701, Sarasota, FL 34236, and our telephone number is (941) 953-9035. Our website address is www.xgtechnology.com. Information contained in our website does not form part of the prospectus and is intended for informational purposes only.

We are an “emerging growth company” as defined in the JOBS Act. We could remain an emerging growth company for up to five years, or until the earliest of (i) the last day of the first fiscal year in which our annual gross revenue exceeds $1 billion, (ii) the date that we become a “large accelerated filer” as defined in Rule 12b-2 under the Exchange Act, which would occur if the market value of our common stock that is held by non-affiliates exceeds $700 million as of the last business day of our most recently completed second fiscal quarter or (iii) the date on which we have issued more than $1 billion in non-convertible debt during the preceding three-year period. Pursuant to Section 102 of the JOBS Act, we have provided reduced executive compensation disclosure and have omitted a compensation discussion and analysis from this prospectus. Pursuant to Section 107 of the JOBS Act, we have elected to utilize the extended transition period provided in Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act for complying with new or revised accounting standards.

5


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

THE OFFERING

Common stock offered by us:    
    [     ] shares.
Over-allotment option:    
    We have offered the underwriters a 45-day option to purchase up to [     ] additional shares of our common stock from us at the public offering price, less underwriting discounts. The option may be exercised only to cover any over-allotments.
Common stock outstanding after this offering:    
    [     ] shares, assuming all shares offered have been issued and sold (including the over-allotment option shares)
Use of proceeds:    
    We estimate that the net proceeds from our sale of shares of our common stock in this offering will be approximately $[     ] million, or approximately $[     ] million if the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full, based on the public offering price of $[     ] per share, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and estimated offering expenses payable by us.
    We expect to use the net proceeds of this offering for general corporate purposes, including working capital, product development, marketing activities, expanding our internal sales organization and further developing sales channels, funding the set-up of contract manufacturing production lines and other capital expenditures. In addition, we may use a portion of the net proceeds from this offering we receive for acquisitions of, or investments in, complementary businesses, products, technologies or other assets.
Risk Factors:    
    See the section entitled “Risk Factors” beginning on page 10 for a discussion of factors to consider carefully before deciding whether to purchase shares of our common stock.
NASDAQ Symbol:    
    Common Stock — “XGTI”

The number of shares of our common stock to be issued and outstanding after this offering is based on 18,800,564 shares of common stock issued and outstanding as of the date of this prospectus, which number excludes:

285,714 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of the option granted to MBTH on February 7, 2011 (as amended by agreement between us and MBTH as of January 16, 2013) at an exercise price of $13.30 per share (the “Modified Exercise Price”), which was subsequently lowered to $5.50 on September 30, 2013;
285,714 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of the option granted to MBTH on February 7, 2011 (as amended by agreement between us and MBTH as of January 16, 2013) at the Modified Exercise Price per share, which was subsequently lowered to $5.50 on September 30, 2013;
57,142 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of the conversion rights granted to Treco International, S.A. (“Treco”) on October 6, 2011 at a conversion price of $35.00;
Up to 42,857 shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of the rights to be granted to MBTH to subscribe to new shares at a subscription price of $0.35 per new share if the holders of warrants to subscribe for MBTH shares or exchange for existing shares in our common stock held by MBTH (the “MBTH Warrants”) are exercised by the holders thereof (the “Additional Warrants”). MBTH Warrants were granted by MBTH, on the basis of one warrant for every $350 invested in MBTH, to investors in MBTH of funds for MBTH to lend to us under the May 2011 Shareholder Loan. The

6


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

actual number of Additional Warrants to be granted by us depends on the cost to MBTH resulting from the exercise of the MBTH Warrants;
1,363,636 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of the warrant issued to MBTH pursuant to the onetime agreement approved on September 30, 2013, exercisable at $6.87 per share.
1,093,778 warrants issued to MBTH and other investors pursuant to the conversion of the Bridge Loan, exercisable at $6.87 per share.
27,870 shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of the rights to be granted to investors as part of the Bridge Loan, which are exercisable at $0.35 per share;
142,857 shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of the options agreed to be granted to MBTH on January 16, 2013 at an exercise price of $8.75 per share in consideration for ongoing strategic and commercial advisory services provided by MBTH to us;
931,873 shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of stock options outstanding under the 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009, and 2013 Stock Incentive Plans;
8,571 warrants issued to Secure Strategy Group exercisable at $35.00 per share;
14,285 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of warrants granted to Mats Wennberg which are exercisable at $7.87 per share;
769,230 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of warrants sold to investors as part of our initial public offering, including those issued as part of the over-allotment, which are exercisable at $6.87 per share; and
40,134 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of warrants granted to underwriters as part of our initial public offering completed on July 24, 2013, which are exercisable at $6.87 per share; and
171,450 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of warrants granted to underwriters as part of our public offering completed on November 18, 2013, which are exercisable at $2.1875 per share.

Unless otherwise indicated, all information in this prospectus assumes a public offering price of $2.74 per share of common stock.

7


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUMMARY FINANCIAL DATA

The following table presents a summary of certain historical financial information. Historical results are not necessarily indicative of future results and you should read the following summary financial data in conjunction with “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. The summary financial data for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 were derived from our audited financial statements. The summary financial data in this section are not intended to replace the financial statements and are qualified in their entirety by the financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
BALANCE SHEETS
AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2013
(IN THOUSANDS EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)

   
  December 31,
     2013   2012
ASSETS
                 
Current assets
                 
Cash   $ 5,517     $ 271  
Inventory     2,916        
Accounts receivable, net of allowance of $16 ($470 from related party,
net of allowance of $10)
    788        
Prepaid expenses and other current assets     49       16  
Due from related party     1,350        
Total current assets     10,620       287  
Property and equipment, net     806       1,725  
Intangible assets, net     18,196       17,608  
Total assets   $ 29,622     $ 19,620  
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY (DEFICIT)
                 
Current liabilities
                 
Accounts payable   $ 1,841     $ 655  
Accrued expenses     772       754  
Accrued bonuses     298       2,633  
Accrued interest     42       42  
Accrued interest to related parties           1,127  
Due to related party     1,526       1,098  
Deferred revenue – related party     480        
Obligation under capital lease     129        
Convertible notes payable to related party           17,198  
Total current liabilities     5,088       23,507  
Long-term obligation under capital lease     118        
Convertible notes payable     2,000       2,000  
Total liabilities     7,206       25,507  
Commitments
 
Stockholders’ equity (deficit)
                 
Series A Convertible Preferred Stock – $0.01 par value per share:
                 
10,000,000 and 25,000,000 shares authorized, none issued or outstanding as of
December 31, 2013 and 2012
           
Common stock – $0.00001 par value: 300,000,000 and 250,000,000 shares authorized, 18,682,310 and 6,041,946 shares issued and outstanding as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively     —*       —*  
Additional paid in capital     174,000       118,247  
Accumulated deficit     (151,562 )      (124,112 ) 
Treasury stock, at cost – 2,284 shares as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively     (22 )      (22 ) 
Total stockholder’s equity (deficit)     22,416       (5,887 ) 
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $ 29,622     $ 19,620  

* Less than $1

8


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
  
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2013
(IN THOUSANDS EXCEPT NET LOSS PER SHARE DATA)

   
  For the Year Ended December 31,
     2013   2012
Revenue   $ 406     $  
Cost of revenue and operating expenses
                 
Cost of components and personnel     102        
General and administrative expenses     5,501       5,543  
Development     5,468       4,806  
Stock based compensation     796       554  
Amortization and depreciation     2,370       2,063  
Total cost of revenue and operating expenses     14,237       12,966  
Loss from operations     (13,831 )      (12,966 ) 
Other income (expense)
                 
Other expense     (10,068 )       
Inducement expense     (391 )       
Interest expense, net     (2,227 )      (535 ) 
Impairment     (933 )      (286 ) 
Total other income (expense)     (13,619 )      (821 ) 
Loss before income tax provision     (27,450 )      (13,787 ) 
Income tax provision            
Net loss   $ (27,450 )    $ (13,787 ) 
Basic and diluted net loss per share     (2.86 )      (2.29 ) 
Weighted average number of shares outstanding basic and diluted     9,598       6,031  
                                                                 

9


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

RISK FACTORS

Our business faces many risks and an investment in our common stock involves significant risks. Prospective investors are strongly encouraged to consider carefully the risks described below, as well as other information contained herein, before investing. Investors are further advised that the risks described below may not be the only risks we face. Additional risks that we do not yet know of, or that we currently think are immaterial, may also negatively impact our business operations or financial results. If any of the events or circumstances described in this section occurs, our business, financial condition or results of operations could suffer. Prospective investors in our common stock should consider the following risks before deciding whether to purchase shares.

Risks Related to the Company and Our Business

We have a history of operating losses and we expect to continue to realize net losses for at least the next 12 months.

We have recorded a net loss in each reporting period since our inception. Our net loss in the year ended December 31, 2013 was approximately $27,450,000. Our accumulated deficit at December 31, 2013 was approximately $151,562,000. The Company began its research and development activities in 2002, and has had significant net losses and will likely continue to incur net losses until we can successfully commercialize our products and technology. Our independent registered public accounting firm has expressed substantial doubt concerning our ability to continue as a going concern. Our ability to continue as a going concern is dependent upon our ability to raise additional capital, obtain other financing or fulfill our existing backlog. The Company expects to continue to have development costs as it develops the next generation of products. In addition, at this stage of our development we are subject to the following risks:

our results of operations may fluctuate significantly, which may adversely affect the value of an investment in our common stock;
we may be unable to develop and commercialize our products; and
it may be difficult to forecast accurately our key operating and performance metrics because of our limited operating history.

We may require additional capital in the future to develop new products. If we do not obtain any such additional financing, if required, our business prospects, financial condition and results of operations will be adversely affected.

We may require additional capital in the future to develop new products. We believe that the proceeds of this offering and revenues from operations will be sufficient to satisfy our needs for at least the next 12 months. We may need to obtain significant additional financing, both in the near and long term, to make planned capital expenditures, cover operating expenses and fund our ongoing development. We may not be able to secure adequate additional financing when needed on acceptable terms, or at all. To execute our business strategy, we may issue additional equity securities in public or private offerings, potentially at a price lower than the public offering price in this offering or the market price of our common stock at the time of such issuance. If we cannot secure sufficient additional funding we may be forced to forego strategic opportunities or delay, scale back and eliminate future product development.

Defects or errors in our products and services or in products made by our suppliers could harm our brand and relations with our customers and expose us to liability. If we experience product recalls, we may incur significant expenses and experience decreased demand for our products.

Our products are inherently complex and may contain defects and errors that are only detectable when the products are in use. Because our products are used for both personal and business purposes, such defects or errors could have a serious impact on our end customers, which could damage our reputation, harm our customer relationships and expose us to liability. Defects or impurities in our components, materials or software, equipment failures or other difficulties could adversely affect our ability, and that of our customers, to ship products on a timely basis as well as customer or licensee demand for our products. Any such shipment delays or declines in demand could reduce our revenues and harm our ability to achieve or sustain desired levels of profitability. We

10


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

and our customers may also experience component or software failures or defects that could require significant product recalls, rework and/or repairs that are not covered by warranty reserves.

Amounts included in our total backlog and order backlog may not result in actual billings or revenue or translate into profits.

Our total backlog represents future product and service billings that we expect to generate pursuant to contracts that we have entered into with our customers. Our total backlog includes our order backlog, which represents future billings for open purchase orders and other firm commitments. We anticipate that our total backlog and order backlog will fluctuate from period to period throughout our fiscal year 2014 and beyond.

As an emerging company our backlog is significant when compared to our historical revenue and the revenue we anticipate in the foreseeable future. We cannot guarantee that our total backlog or order backlog will result in actual billings in the originally anticipated period or at all. In addition, the purchase agreements and contracts reflected in our total backlog and order backlog may not generate margins that we anticipate. Given that we have only recently begun to market our current product and service offerings, we only recently began to track total backlog and order backlog on a consistent basis as performance measures and as a result, we do not have significant experience in determining the level of realization that we will actually achieve on our total backlog and order backlog.

Our customer contracts are typically structured as purchase and service agreements. The deployments called for under our agreements could extend for a number of years but these agreements could expire before all such purchases or services are delivered. Total backlog is an estimate based upon contractual terms, existing purchase orders and other available information regarding the amount and timing of expected future purchase orders to be placed by our customers and distributors, including non-binding forecasts.

No assurance can be made that firm purchase orders will yield revenues in the amounts we estimate, within the time period we expect, or at all. Total backlog is subject to adjustments due to the nature of our customer deployments. Adjustments can result from a variety of factors, including changes in the nature or scope of customer deployments, the impact of contingency provisions related to future delivery or performance, customer cancellations, the inability of customers to secure necessary financing, market conditions, delayed regulatory approvals and customer defaults. If our total backlog or order backlog fails to materialize as expected, we could experience a material reduction in future billings, revenue, and operating results.

Our recognition of deferred revenue is subject to future performance obligations and may not be representative of revenues for future periods.

We currently have $480,000 of deferred revenue recorded as a liability on our balance sheet. This deferred revenue was recorded based on shipments of our hardware products to companies that are owned or controlled by our director, Larry Townes. Currently, we are awaiting payment for the equipment that has been delivered in those transactions as the purchasers have indicated that the equipment does not meet certain technical specifications associated with their networks and that they do not intend to deliver payment until such technical specifications are satisfied. We cannot assure you that we will receive payment for these shipments or that this deferred revenue will be collected. See “Certain Relationships and Related Transactions — Subsidiaries of Townes Tele-Communications, Inc. (“Townes Tele-Communications”).

In accordance with the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”), GAAP, and SEC Staff accounting guidance on revenue recognition, the Company considers revenue earned and realizable when: (a) persuasive evidence of the sales arrangement exists, (b) the arrangement fee is fixed or determinable, (c) service delivery or performance has occurred, (d) customer acceptance has been received, if contractually required, and (e) collectability of the arrangement fee is probable.

Due to potential future changes in customer preferences, or delays in customer development or implementation schedules or budgets, and the need for us to satisfactorily perform product support and other services, deferred revenue and backlog amounts at any particular date may not be representative of actual revenue for any current or future period.

11


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Although certain technical problems experienced by users may not be caused by our products, our business and reputation may be harmed if users perceive our solutions as the cause of a slow or unreliable network connection, or a high profile network failure.

We expect that our products will be in many different locations and user environments and will be capable of providing mobile broadband connectivity and interference mitigation, among other applications. The ability of our products to operate effectively can be negatively impacted by many different elements unrelated to our products. Although certain technical problems experienced by users may not be caused by our products, users often may perceive the underlying cause to be a result of poor performance of our technology. This perception, even if incorrect, could harm our business and reputation. Similarly, a high profile network failure may be caused by improper operation of the network or failure of a network component that we did not supply, but other service providers may perceive that our products were implicated, which, even if incorrect, could harm our business, operating results and financial condition.

Our ability to sell our products will be highly dependent on the quality of our support and services offerings, and our failure to offer high-quality support and services would have a material adverse effect on our sales and results of operations.

Once our products are deployed, our channel partners and end-customers will depend on our support organization to resolve any issues relating to our products. A high level of support will be important for the successful marketing and sale of our products. In many cases, our channel partners will likely provide support directly to our end-customers. We will not have complete control over the level or quality of support provided by our channel partners. These channel partners may also provide support for other third-party products, which may potentially distract resources from support for our products. If we and our channel partners do not effectively assist our end-customers in deploying our products, succeed in helping our end-customers quickly resolve post-deployment issues or provide effective ongoing support, our ability to sell our products to existing end-customers could be adversely affected and our reputation with potential end-customers could be harmed. In some cases, we guarantee a certain level of performance to our channel partners and end-customers, which could prove to be resource-intensive and expensive for us to fulfill if unforeseen technical problems were to arise.

We may fail to recruit and retain qualified personnel.

We expect to rapidly expand our operations and grow our sales, development and administrative operations. This expansion is expected to place a significant strain on our management and will require hiring a significant number of qualified personnel. Accordingly, recruiting and retaining such personnel in the future will be critical to our success. There is intense competition from other companies for qualified personnel in the areas of our activities. If we fail to identify, attract, retain and motivate these highly skilled personnel, we may be unable to continue our marketing and development activities, and this could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s business, financial condition, results of operations and future prospects.

We rely on key executive officers, and their knowledge of our business and technical expertise would be difficult to replace.

We are highly dependent on our executive officers because of their expertise and experience in the telecommunications industry. We have agreements with our executive officers containing customary non-disclosure, non-compete, confidentiality and assignment of inventions provisions. We do not have “key person” life insurance policies for any of our officers. The loss of the technical knowledge and management and industry expertise of any of our key personnel could result in delays in product development, loss of customers and sales and diversion of management resources, which could adversely affect our operating results.

We and our contract manufacturers purchase some components, subassemblies and products from a limited number of suppliers. The loss of any of these suppliers may substantially disrupt our ability to obtain orders and fulfill sales as we design in and qualify new components.

We rely on third party components and technology to build and operate our products, and we rely on our contract manufacturers to obtain the components, subassemblies and products necessary for the manufacture of our products. Shortages in components that we use in our products are possible, and our ability to predict the

12


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

availability of such components is limited. While components and supplies are generally available from a variety of sources, we and our contract manufacturers currently depend on a single or limited number of suppliers for several components for our products. If our suppliers of these components or technology were to enter into exclusive relationships with other providers of wireless networking equipment or were to discontinue providing such components and technology to us and we were unable to replace them cost effectively, or at all, our ability to provide our products would be impaired. We and our contract manufacturers generally rely on purchase orders rather than long-term contracts with these suppliers. As a result, even if available, we and our contract manufacturers may not be able to secure sufficient components at reasonable prices or of acceptable quality to build our products in a timely manner. Therefore, we may be unable to meet customer demand for our products, which would have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial condition.

Our intellectual property protections may be insufficient to properly safeguard our technology.

Our success and ability to compete effectively are, in large part, dependent upon proprietary technology that we have developed internally. Given the rapid pace of innovation and technological change within the wireless and broadband industries, the technological and creative skill of our personnel, consultants and contractors and their ability to develop, enhance and market new products and upgrades to existing products are critical to our continued success. We rely primarily on patent laws to protect our proprietary rights. As of March 31, 2014, in the United States, we have 49 patents granted and 11 patent applications pending. Internationally, we have 64 patents granted, 66 patent applications pending, and 8 Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) applications. There can be no assurance that patents pending or future patent applications will be issued, or that if issued, we would have the resources to protect any such issued patent from infringement. Further, we cannot patent much of the technology that is important to our business. To date, we have relied on copyright, trademark and trade secret laws, as well as confidentiality procedures, non-compete and/or work for hire invention assignment agreements and licensing arrangements with our employees, consultants, contractors, customers and vendors, to establish and protect our rights to this technology and, to the best extent possible, control the access to and distribution of our technology, software, documentation and other proprietary information. Despite these precautions, it may be possible for a third party to copy or otherwise obtain and use this technology without authorization. Policing unauthorized use of this technology is difficult. There can be no assurance that the steps we take or will take will prevent misappropriation of, or prevent an unauthorized third party from obtaining or using, the technology we rely on. In addition, effective protection may be unavailable or limited in some jurisdictions. Litigation may be necessary in the future to enforce or protect our rights.

We may be subject to claims of intellectual property infringement or invalidity. Expenses incurred with respect to monitoring, protecting, and defending our intellectual property rights could adversely affect our business.

Competitors and others may infringe on our intellectual property rights, or may allege that we have infringed on theirs. Monitoring infringement and misappropriation of intellectual property can be difficult and expensive, and we may not be able to detect infringement or misappropriation of our proprietary rights. We may also incur significant litigation expenses in protecting our intellectual property or defending our use of intellectual property, reducing our ability to fund product initiatives. These expenses could have an adverse effect on our future cash flows and results of operations. If we are found to infringe on the rights of others we could be required to discontinue offering certain products or systems, to pay damages, or purchase a license to use the intellectual property in question from its owner. Litigation can also distract management from the day-to-day operations of the business.

Enforcement of our intellectual property rights abroad, particularly in China, is limited and it is often difficult to protect and enforce such rights.

Patent protection outside the United States is generally not as comprehensive as in the United States and may not protect our intellectual property in some countries where our products are sold or may be sold in the future. Even if patents are granted outside the United States, effective enforcement in those countries may not be available. Many companies have encountered substantial intellectual property infringement in countries where we sell, or intend to sell, products or have our products manufactured.

13


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

In particular, the legal regime relating to intellectual property rights in China is limited and it is often difficult to protect and enforce such rights. The regulatory scheme for enforcing China’s intellectual property laws may not be as developed as regulatory schemes in other countries. Any advancement of an intellectual property enforcement claim through China’s regulatory scheme may require an extensive amount of time, allowing intellectual property infringers to continue largely unimpeded, to our commercial detriment in the Chinese and other export markets. In addition, rules of evidence may be unclear, inconsistent or difficult to comply with, making it difficult to prove infringement of our intellectual property rights. As a result, enforcement cases involving technology, such as copyright infringement of software code, or unauthorized manufacture or sale of products containing patented inventions, may be difficult or not possible to sustain.

These factors may make it increasingly complicated for us to enforce our intellectual property rights against parties misappropriating or copying our technology or products without our authorization, allowing competing enterprises to harm our business in the Chinese or other export markets by affecting the pricing for our products, reducing our own sales and diluting our brand or product quality reputation.

The intellectual property rights of others may prevent us from developing new products or entering new markets.

The telecommunications industry is characterized by the rapid development of new technologies, which requires us to continuously introduce new products and expand into new markets that may be created. Therefore, our success depends in part on our ability to continually adapt our products and systems to incorporate new technologies and to expand into markets that may be created by new technologies. If technologies are protected by the intellectual property rights of others, including our competitors, we may be prevented from introducing new products or expanding into new markets created by these technologies. If the intellectual property rights of others prevent us from taking advantage of innovative technologies, our financial condition, operating results or prospects may be harmed.

We rely on the availability of third-party licenses. If these licenses are available to us only on less favorable terms or not at all in the future, our business and operating results would be harmed.

We have incorporated third-party licensed technology into our products. It may be necessary in the future to renew licenses relating to various aspects of these products or to seek additional licenses for existing or new products. There can be no assurance that the necessary licenses will be available on acceptable terms or at all. The inability to obtain certain licenses or other rights, or to obtain those licenses or rights on favorable terms, or the need to engage in litigation regarding these matters, could result in delays in product releases until such time, if ever, as equivalent technology could be identified, licensed or developed and integrated into our products and might have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial condition. Moreover, the inclusion in our products of intellectual property licensed from third parties on a nonexclusive basis could limit our ability to protect our proprietary rights in our products.

Our customers could also become the target of litigation relating to the patent and other intellectual property rights of others.

Any litigation relating to the intellectual property rights of others could trigger technical support and indemnification obligations in licenses or customer agreements that we may enter into. These obligations could result in substantial expenses, including the payment by us of costs and damages relating to claims of intellectual property infringement. In addition to the time and expense required for us to provide support or indemnification to our customers, any such litigation could disrupt the businesses of our customers, which in turn could hurt our relationships with such customers and cause the sale of our products to decrease. No assurance can be given that claims for indemnification will not be made, or that if made, such claims would not have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results or financial conditions.

We expect to base our inventory purchasing decisions on our forecasts of customers’ demand, and if our forecasts are inaccurate, our operating results could be materially harmed.

As our customer base increases, we expect to place orders with our contract manufacturers based on our forecasts of our customers’ demand. Our forecasts will be based on multiple assumptions, each of which may cause our estimates to be inaccurate, affecting our ability to provide products to our customers. When demand

14


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

for our products increases significantly, we may not be able to meet demand on a timely basis, and we may need to expend a significant amount of time working with our customers to allocate limited supply and maintain positive customer relations, or we may incur additional costs in order to rush the manufacture and delivery of additional products. If we underestimate customers’ demand, we may forego revenue opportunities, lose market share and damage our customer relationships. Conversely, if we overestimate customer demand, we may purchase more inventory than we are able to sell at any given time or at all. In addition, we grant our distributors stock rotation rights, which require us to accept stock back from a distributor’s inventory, including obsolete inventory. As a result of our failure to properly estimate demand for our products, we could have excess or obsolete inventory, resulting in a decline in the value of our inventory, which would increase our costs of revenues and reduce our liquidity. Our failure to accurately manage inventory relative to demand would adversely affect our operating results.

If our technology does not work as well as planned or if we are unsuccessful in developing and selling new products or in penetrating new markets, our business and operating results would suffer.

Our success and ability to compete are dependent on technology which we have developed or may develop in the future. There is a risk that the technology that we have developed or may develop may not work as intended, or that the marketing of the technology may not be as successful as anticipated. Further, the markets in which we and our customers compete or plan to compete are characterized by constantly and rapidly changing technologies and technological obsolescence. Our ability to compete successfully depends on our ability to design, develop, manufacture, assemble, test, market and support new products and enhancements on a timely and cost effective basis to keep pace with market needs and satisfy the demands of customers. A fundamental shift in technologies in any of our target markets could harm our competitive position within these markets. Our failure to anticipate these shifts, to develop new technologies or to react to changes in existing technologies could materially delay our development of new products, which could result in product obsolescence, decreased revenue and a loss of customer wins to our competitors. The development of new technologies and products generally require substantial investment and can require long development and testing periods before they are commercially viable. We intend to continue to make substantial investments in developing new technologies and products and it is possible that that we may not successfully be able to develop or acquire new products or product enhancements that compete effectively within our target markets or differentiate our products based on functionality, performance or cost and that our new technologies and products will not result in meaningful revenue. Any delays in developing and releasing new or enhanced products could cause us to lose revenue opportunities and customers. Any technical flaws in product releases could diminish the innovative impact of our products and have a negative effect on customer adoption and our reputation. If we fail to introduce new products that meet the demands of our customers or target markets or do not achieve market acceptance, or if we fail to penetrate new markets, our revenue will not increase over time and our operating results and competitive position would suffer.

Computer malware, viruses, hacking and phishing attacks could harm our business and results of operations.

Computer malware, viruses, and computer hacking and phishing attacks have become more prevalent in our industry, and may occur on our systems in the future. Though it is difficult to determine what, if any, harm may directly result from any specific interruption or attack, any failure to maintain performance, reliability, security, and availability of our products and technical infrastructure to the satisfaction of our users may harm our reputation and our ability to attract and retain customers.

Our operating expenses will increase as we make further expenditures to enhance and expand our operations in order to support additional growth in our business.

Historically, we limited our investment in infrastructure; however, in the future we expect our infrastructure investments to increase substantially to support our anticipated growth. We intend to make additional investments in systems and personnel in order to expand our business and continue to expand our operations to support anticipated growth in our business. In addition, we may determine the need in the future to make changes to our sales model, which changes may result in higher selling, general and administrative expenses as a percentage of our revenues. As a result of these factors, we expect our operating expenses to increase.

15


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

If we do not effectively manage changes in our business, these changes could place a significant strain on our management and operations.

Our ability to grow successfully requires an effective planning and management process. The expansion and growth of our business could place a significant strain on our management systems, infrastructure and other resources. To manage our growth successfully, we must continue to improve and expand our systems and infrastructure in a timely and efficient manner. Our controls, systems, procedures and resources may not be adequate to support a changing and growing company. If our management fails to respond effectively to changes and growth in our business, including acquisitions, this could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s business, financial condition, results of operations and future prospects.

If we are unable to expand our sales and marketing capabilities or enter into more agreements with third parties to sell and market any products we may develop, we may be unable to generate product revenue.

We are currently building our internal sales organization for the sales, marketing and distribution of our products. Part of the proceeds of the Offering is intended to be used to expand our internal sales organization and develop further our channels to market. In order to commercialize xMax® or any of our other products, we must build our sales, marketing, distribution, managerial and other non-technical capabilities or make arrangements with other parties to perform these services. The expansion of our own sales force to market any products we may develop will increase our operating costs and be time consuming. We cannot be certain that we would be able to successfully develop this capacity. If we are unable to expand our sales and marketing capability or any other non-technical capabilities necessary to commercialize any product we may develop, we will need to contract with other parties to market and sell any products we may develop. If we are unable to establish adequate sales, marketing and distribution capabilities, whether independently or with other parties, we may not be able to generate product revenue and may not become profitable.

If our estimates relating to our critical accounting policies are based on assumptions or judgments that change or prove to be incorrect, our operating results could fall below expectations of securities analysts and investors, resulting in a decline in our stock price.

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires our management to make estimates, assumptions and judgments that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. We base our estimates on historical experience and on various other assumptions that we believe to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which form the basis for making judgments about the carrying values of assets, liabilities, equity, revenue and expenses that are not readily apparent from other sources. Our operating results may be adversely affected if our assumptions change or if actual circumstances differ from those in our assumptions, which could cause our operating results to fall below the expectations of financial analysts and investors, resulting in a decline in our stock price. Significant assumptions and estimates used in preparing our financial statements include those related to revenue recognition, inventory, product warranties, allowance for doubtful accounts, stock-based compensation expense and income taxes.

Our exposure to the credit risks of our customers may make it difficult to collect accounts receivable and could adversely affect our operating results and financial condition.

In the course of our sales to customers, we may encounter difficulty collecting accounts receivable and could be exposed to risks associated with uncollectible accounts receivable. Economic conditions may impact some of our customers’ ability to pay their accounts payable. While we will attempt to monitor these situations carefully and attempt to take appropriate measures to collect accounts receivable balances, we have written down accounts receivable and written off doubtful accounts in prior periods and may be unable to avoid accounts receivable write-downs or write-offs of doubtful accounts in the future. Such write-downs or write-offs could negatively affect our operating results for the period in which they occur.

Demand for our defense-related products depends on government spending.

The U.S. military market is largely dependent upon government budgets, particularly the defense budget. The funding of government programs is subject to Congressional appropriation. Although multi-year contracts may be authorized in connection with major procurements, Congress generally appropriates funds on a fiscal year

16


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

basis even though a program may be expected to continue for several years. Consequently, programs are often only partially funded and additional funds are committed only as Congress makes further appropriations. No assurance can be given that an increase in defense spending will be allocated to programs that would benefit our business. A decrease in levels of defense spending or the government’s termination of, or failure to fully fund, one or more of the contracts for which our products may be utilized could have a material adverse effect on our financial position and results of operations.

Our failure to obtain and maintain required certifications could impair our ability to bid on defense contracts.

In order for us to participate in certain government programs we could be required to obtain and maintain quality certification and certain standards for Department of Defense wireless security such as certification by the Joint Interoperability and Test Command, (or “JITC”) and to meet production standards in order to be eligible to bid on government contracts. If we fail to maintain these certifications or any additional certification which may be required, we will be ineligible to bid for contracts which may impair our financial operations and consequently, our ability to continue in business.

Regulation of the telecommunications industry could harm our operating results and future prospects.

The traditional telecommunications industry is highly regulated, and our business and financial condition could be adversely affected by changes in regulations relating to the Internet telecommunications industry.

Currently, there are few laws or regulations that apply directly to access to or commerce on IP networks, but future regulations could include sales taxes and tariffs in previously unregulated areas and provider access charges. We could be adversely affected by regulation of IP networks and commerce in any country where we market equipment and services to service or content providers. Regulations governing the range of services and business models that can be offered by service providers or content providers could adversely affect those customers’ needs for products designed to enable a wide range of such services or business models. For instance, the U.S. Federal Communications Commission has issued regulations governing aspects of fixed broadband networks and wireless networks. These regulations might impact service provider and content provider business models and as such, providers’ needs for Internet telecommunications equipment and services. In addition, many jurisdictions are evaluating or implementing regulations relating to cyber security, privacy and data protection, which could affect the market and requirements for networking and security equipment.

In addition, environmental regulations relevant to electronic equipment manufacturing or operations may impact our business and financial condition adversely. For instance, the European Union has adopted regulations on Electronic waste, e-waste, e-scrap, or waste electrical and electronic equipment (“WEEE”), Restriction of the Use of certain Hazardous Substances (“ROHS”) and Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemical substances (“REACH”). In addition, some governments have regulations prohibiting government entities from purchasing security products that do not meet specified indigenous certification criteria even though those criteria may be in conflict with accepted international standards. Similar regulations are in effect or under consideration in several jurisdictions where we do business.

The adoption and implementation of such regulations could decrease demand for our products, increase the cost of building and selling our products and impact our ability to ship products into affected areas and recognize revenue in a timely manner. Any of these impacts could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, and results of operations.

To the extent that we subcontract work under our contracts, any failures by our subcontractors could impair our relations with the contracting agencies.

We may use subcontractors to perform work or provide materials for contracts that we may secure and we may become dependent upon the subcontractors to meet the quality and delivery requirements of the contracting agency. To the extent that the products or services provided by the subcontractors do not meet the required specifications or are delivered late, the contract may be terminated by the U.S. government for default. Such a default could result in our disqualification from bidding on contracts, which could adversely affect our financial operations.

17


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

As an emerging growth company as defined in the JOBS Act, we will utilize certain modified disclosure requirements, and we cannot be certain if these reduced requirements will make our common stock less attractive to investors.

We are an emerging growth company as defined in the JOBS Act. We have in this prospectus utilized, and we plan in future filings with the SEC to continue to utilize, the modified disclosure requirements available to emerging growth companies, including reduced disclosure about our executive compensation and omission of compensation discussion and analysis, and an exemption from the requirement of holding a nonbinding advisory vote on executive compensation. In addition, we will not be subject to certain requirements of Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, including the additional testing of our internal control over financial reporting as may occur when outside auditors attest as to our internal control over financial reporting. As a result, our stockholders may not have access to certain information they may deem important.

In addition, Section 107 of the JOBS Act also provides that an emerging growth company can utilize the extended transition period provided in Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act for complying with new or revised accounting standards. Thus, an emerging growth company can delay the adoption of certain accounting standards until those standards would otherwise apply to private companies. We have elected to utilize this extended transition period. Our financial statements may therefore not be comparable to those of companies that comply with such new or revised accounting standards as they become applicable to public companies. We cannot predict if investors will find our common stock less attractive because we will rely on these exemptions. If some investors find our common stock less attractive as a result, there may be a less active trading market for our common stock and our stock price may be more volatile.

We could remain an “emerging growth company” for up to five years, or until the earliest of (i) the last day of the first fiscal year in which our annual gross revenue exceeds $1 billion, (ii) the date that we become a “large accelerated filer” as defined in Rule 12b-2 under the Exchange Act, which would occur if the market value of our common stock that is held by non-affiliates exceeds $700 million as of the last business day of our most recently completed second fiscal quarter or (iii) the date on which we have issued more than $1 billion in non-convertible debt during the preceding three-year period.

We have not performed an evaluation of our internal control over financial reporting, such as required by Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, nor have we engaged our independent registered public accounting firm to perform an audit of our internal control over financial reporting as of any balance sheet date or for any period reported in our financial statements. Had we performed such an evaluation or had our independent registered public accounting firm performed an audit of our internal control over financial reporting, material weaknesses may have been identified. For so long as we qualify as an “emerging growth company” under the JOBS Act, which may be up to five years following this offering, we will not have to provide an auditor’s attestation report on our internal controls in future annual reports on Form 10-K as otherwise required by Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. During the course of the evaluation, documentation or attestation, we or our independent registered public accounting firm may identify weaknesses and deficiencies that we may not otherwise identify in a timely manner or at all as a result of the deferred implementation of this additional level of review.

Risks Relating to Our Industry

Our industry is subject to rapid technological change, and we must make substantial investments in new products, services and technologies to compete successfully.

New technological innovations generally require a substantial investment before they are commercially viable. We intend to continue to make substantial investments in developing new products and technologies, and it is possible that our development efforts will not be successful and that our new technologies will not result in meaningful revenues. Our future success will depend on our ability to continue to develop and introduce new products, technologies and enhancements on a timely basis. Our future success will also depend on our ability to keep pace with technological developments, protect our intellectual property, satisfy customer requirements, meet customer expectations, price our products and services competitively and achieve market acceptance. The introduction of products embodying new technologies and the emergence of new industry standards could render our existing products and technologies, and products and technologies currently under development, obsolete and unmarketable. If we fail to anticipate or respond adequately to technological developments or

18


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

customer requirements, or experience any significant delays in development, introduction or shipment of our products and technologies in commercial quantities, demand for our products and our customers’ and licensees’ products that use our technologies could decrease, and our competitive position could be damaged.

We may be subject to infringement claims in the future.

We may be unaware of filed patent applications and issued patents that could include claims covering our products. Parties making claims of infringement may be able to obtain injunctive or other equitable relief that could effectively block our ability to sell or supply our products or license our technology and could cause us to pay substantial royalties, licensing fees or damages. The defense of any lawsuit could divert management’s efforts and attention from ordinary business operations and result in time-consuming and expensive litigation, regardless of the merits of such claims. These outcomes may (i) require us to stop selling products or using technology that contains the allegedly infringing intellectual property; (ii) require us to redesign those products that contain the allegedly infringing intellectual property; (iii) require us to pay substantial damages to the party whose intellectual property rights we may be found to be infringing; (iv) result in the loss of existing customers or prohibit the acquisition of new customers; (v) cause us to attempt to obtain a license to the relevant intellectual property from third parties, which may not be available on reasonable terms or at all; (vi) materially and adversely affect our brand in the market place and cause a substantial loss of goodwill; (vii) cause our stock price to decline significantly; (viii) materially and adversely affect our liquidity, including our ability to pay debts and other obligations as they become due; or (ix) lead to our bankruptcy or liquidation.

Our industry is highly competitive and we may not be able to compete effectively.

The communications industry is highly competitive, rapidly evolving, and subject to constant technological change. We expect that new competitors are likely to join existing competitors. Many of our competitors may be larger and have greater financial, technical, operational, marketing and other resources and experience than we do. In the event that a competitor expends significant resources we may not be able to successfully compete. In addition, the pace of technological change makes it impossible for us to predict whether we will face new competitors using different technologies to provide products. If our competitors were to provide better and more cost effective products than our products we may not be able to capture any significant market share.

Regulation of Voice over Internet Protocol (“VoIP”) services is developing and therefore uncertain and future legislative, regulatory or judicial actions could adversely affect our business.

VoIP services have developed in an environment largely free from government regulation. However, the United States and other countries have begun to assert regulatory authority over VoIP and are continuing to evaluate how VoIP will be regulated in the future. Both the application of existing rules to us and our prospective customers and the effects of future regulatory developments are uncertain. Future legislative, judicial or other regulatory actions could have a negative effect on our business. In addition, future regulatory developments could increase our cost of doing business and limit its growth.

Changes in current laws or regulations or the imposition of new laws or regulations could impede the sale of our products or otherwise harm our business.

Although our technology is designed to be frequency agnostic (i.e., capable of operating at any frequency) our current range of products is being designed to be optimized for operation in the 902 – 928 MHz band, which is presently a spectrum that is not licensed in the United States. Changes in current laws or regulations or the imposition of new laws and regulations in the United States or elsewhere regarding the usage of unlicensed spectrum may materially and adversely impact our future prospects, the viability of our current business model, our expectations for future sales of our products and our business, financial condition and results of operations.

New regulations or standards or changes in existing regulations or standards in the United States or internationally related to our products may result in unanticipated costs or liabilities, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and future sales, and could place additional burdens on the operations of our business.

Our products may be subject to governmental regulations in a variety of jurisdictions. In order to achieve and maintain market acceptance, our technology and products will have to comply with these regulations as well

19


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

as a significant number of industry standards. In the United States, our technology and products will have to comply with various regulations defined by the Federal Communications Commission, or FCC, and others. We may also have to comply with similar international regulations. For example, our wireless communication products operate through the transmission of radio signals, and radio emissions are subject to regulation in the United States and in other countries in which we intend to do business. In the United States, various federal agencies including the Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the Food and Drug Administration, the FCC, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and various state agencies have promulgated regulations that concern the use of radio/electromagnetic emissions standards. Member countries of the European Union have enacted similar standards concerning electrical safety and electromagnetic compatibility and emissions, and chemical substances and use standards.

As these regulations and standards evolve, and if new regulations or standards are implemented, we may be required to modify our technology or products or develop and support new versions of our technology or products, and our compliance with these regulations and standards may become more burdensome. The failure of technology or our products to comply, or delays in compliance, with the various existing and evolving industry regulations and standards could prevent or delay introduction of our technology or products, which could harm our business. End-customer uncertainty regarding future policies may also affect demand for communications products, including our products. Moreover, channel partners or end-customers may require us, or we may otherwise deem it necessary or advisable, to alter our technology or products to address actual or anticipated changes in the regulatory environment. Our inability to alter our technology or products to address these requirements and any regulatory changes may have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial condition.

Compliance with environmental, health and safety laws and regulations, including new regulations requiring higher standards, may increase our costs, limit our ability to utilize supply chains, and force design changes to our products.

Our operations are subject to a variety of environmental, health and safety laws and regulations and equivalent local, state, and regulatory agencies in each of the jurisdictions in which we currently operate or may operate in the future. The manufacturing of our products uses substances regulated under various federal, state, local laws and regulations governing the environment and worker health and safety. If we and our contract manufacturers do not comply with these laws including any new regulations, such non-compliance could reduce the net realizable value of our products, which would result in an immediate charge to our income statements. Our non-compliance with such laws could also negatively impact our operations and financial position as a result of fines, penalties that may be imposed on us, and the cost of mandated remediation or delays to our contract manufacturers, thus we may suffer a loss of revenues, be unable to sell our products in certain markets and/or countries, be subject to penalties and enforced fees and/or suffer a competitive disadvantage. Costs to comply with current laws and regulations and/or similar future laws and regulations, if applicable, could include costs associated with modifying our products, recycling and other waste processing costs, legal and regulatory costs and insurance costs. We cannot assure you that the costs to comply with these new laws or with current and future environmental and worker health and safety laws will not have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial condition.

Governmental regulations affecting the import or export of products or affecting products containing encryption capabilities could negatively affect our revenues.

The United States and various foreign governments have imposed controls, export license requirements, and restrictions on the import or export of some technologies, especially encryption technology. In addition, from time to time, governmental agencies have proposed additional regulation of encryption technology, such as requiring certification, notifications, review of source code, or the escrow and governmental recovery of private encryption keys. For example, Russia and China recently have implemented new requirements relating to products containing encryption and India has imposed special warranty and other obligations associated with technology deemed critical. Governmental regulation of encryption or IP networking technology and regulation of imports or exports, or our failure to obtain required import or export approval for our products, could harm our international and domestic sales prospects and adversely affect our revenue expectation. In addition, failure to comply with such regulations could result in penalties, costs, and restrictions on import or export privileges or adversely affect sales to government agencies or government funded projects.

20


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

If wireless devices pose safety risks, we may be subject to new regulations, and demand for our products and those of our licensees and customers may decrease.

Concerns over the effects of radio frequency emissions, even if unfounded, may have the effect of discouraging the use of wireless devices, which may decrease demand for our products and those of our licensees and customers. In recent years, the FCC and foreign regulatory agencies have updated the guidelines and methods they use for evaluating radio frequency emissions from radio equipment, including wireless phones and other wireless devices. In addition, interest groups have requested that the FCC investigate claims that wireless communication technologies pose health concerns and cause interference with airbags, hearing aids and medical devices. Concerns have also been expressed over the possibility of safety risks due to a lack of attention associated with the use of wireless devices while driving. Any legislation that may be adopted in response to these expressions of concern could reduce demand for our products and those of our licensees and customers in the United States as well as foreign countries.

21


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Risks Related to Market Conditions

Recent global economic trends could adversely affect our business, liquidity and financial results.

Recent global economic conditions, including a disruption of financial markets, could adversely affect us, primarily through limiting our access to capital. In addition, the continuation or worsening of general market conditions in economies important to our businesses may adversely affect our clients’ level of spending and ability to obtain financing, leading to us being unable to generate the levels of sales that we require. Current and continued disruption of financial markets could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s business, financial condition, results of operations and future prospects.

Risks Relating to This Offering and an Investment in Our Securities

Our insiders and affiliated parties beneficially own a significant portion of our stock.

As of March 31, 2014, our executive officers, directors and affiliated parties beneficially own approximately 55.73% of our outstanding common stock. As a result, our executive officers, directors and affiliated parties will have significant influence to:

elect or defeat the election of our directors;
amend or prevent amendment of our articles of incorporation or bylaws; and
effect or prevent a merger, sale of assets or other corporate transaction.

In addition, sales of significant amounts of shares held by our directors and executive officers, or the prospect of these sales, could adversely affect the valuation of our Company.

Exercise of options or warrants or conversion of convertible securities may have a dilutive effect on your percentage ownership, may result in a dilution of your voting power and an increase in the number of shares eligible for future resale in the public market which may negatively impact the trading price of our shares of common stock.

The exercise or conversion of some or all of our outstanding options, warrants, or convertible securities could result in significant dilution in the percentage of ownership of investors in this offering and in the percentage ownership interests of our existing common stockholders and in a significant dilution of voting rights and earnings per share.

At the effective date of this offering, we anticipate having outstanding options to purchase an aggregate of up to 714,285 shares of our common stock, including (i) the options to purchase 571,428 shares of common stock at an exercise price of $5.50 per share granted to MBTH and (ii) the options to purchase 142,857 shares of common stock at an exercise price of $8.75 per share granted to MBTH; and outstanding warrants to purchase up to 3,588,953 shares of common stock, including (i) the warrants to subscribe up to 42,857 shares in our common stock at a subscription price of $0.35 per share granted to MBTH, (ii) the warrant to purchase 8,571 shares of our common stock issued to Secure Strategy Group exercisable at $35.00 per share, (iii) the warrant to purchase 14,285 shares of our common stock exercisable at $7.87 per share granted to Mats Wennberg, (iv) 769,230 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of warrants sold to investors as part of our initial public offering, including those issued as part of the over-allotment, which are exercisable at $6.87 per share, (v) the warrants to purchase 40,134 shares of common stock at an exercise price of $6.87 per share granted pursuant to our initial public offering completed on July 24, 2013, to the Underwriters, (vi) the warrants to purchase 1,363,636 shares of common stock at an exercise price of $6.87 per share issued pursuant to a onetime agreement approved on September 30, 2013; (vii) the warrants to purchase 1,093,778 shares of common stock at an exercise price of $6.87 per share granted pursuant to the conversion of the Bridge Loan and outstanding securities convertible into 57,142 shares of our common stock issuable to Treco at a conversion price of $35.00 per share, (viii) 27,870 shares of common stock issuable upon exercise of the rights to be granted to investors as part of the Bridge Loan, which are exercisable at $0.35 share; and (ix) the warrants to purchase 171,450 shares of common stock at an exercise price of $2.1875 per share granted pursuant to our public offering completed on November 18, 2013, to the Underwriters.

22


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Additionally, the issuance of up to 931,873 shares of common stock upon exercise of stock options outstanding under our stock incentive plans will further dilute our stockholders’ voting interests. To the extent options and/or warrants and/or conversion rights are exercised, additional shares of common stock will be issued, and such issuance will dilute stockholders.

In addition to the dilutive effects described above, the exercise of those securities would lead to an increase in the number of shares eligible for resale in the public market. Sales of substantial numbers of such shares in the public market could adversely affect the market price of our shares. Substantial dilution and/or a substantial increase in the number of common shares available for future resale may negatively impact the trading price of our shares of common stock.

We may seek to raise additional funds, finance acquisitions or develop strategic relationships by issuing securities that would dilute your ownership. Depending on the terms available to us, if these activities result in significant dilution, it may negatively impact the trading price of our shares of common stock.

We have financed our operations, and we expect to continue to finance our operations, acquisitions, if any, and the development of strategic relationships by issuing equity and/or convertible securities, which could significantly reduce the percentage ownership of our existing stockholders. Further, any additional financing that we secure may require the granting of rights, preferences or privileges senior to, or pari passu with, those of our common stock. Any issuances by us of equity securities may be at or below the prevailing market price of our stock and in any event may have a dilutive impact on your ownership interest, which could cause the market price of our stock to decline. We may also raise additional funds through the incurrence of debt or the issuance or sale of other securities or instruments senior to our common shares. The holders of any securities or instruments we may issue may have rights superior to the rights of our common stockholders. If we experience dilution from issuance of additional securities and we grant superior rights to new securities over common stockholders, it may negatively impact the trading price of our shares of common stock and you may lose all or part of your investment.

The market price for our common shares is particularly volatile given our status as a relatively unknown company with a small and thinly traded public float, and lack of profits, which could lead to wide fluctuations in our share price. You may be unable to sell your common shares at or above your purchase price, which may result in substantial losses to you.

The market for our common shares is characterized by significant price volatility when compared to the shares of larger, more established companies that trade on a national securities exchange and have large public floats, and we expect that our share price will continue to be more volatile than the shares of such larger, more established companies for the indefinite future. The volatility in our share price is attributable to a number of factors. First, as noted above, our common shares are, compared to the shares of such larger, more established companies, sporadically and thinly traded. The price for our shares could, for example, decline precipitously in the event that a large number of our common shares are sold on the market without commensurate demand. Secondly, we are a speculative or “risky” investment due to our lack of profits to date. As a consequence of this enhanced risk, more risk-adverse investors may, under the fear of losing all or most of their investment in the event of negative news or lack of progress, be more inclined to sell their shares on the market more quickly and at greater discounts than would be the case with the stock of a larger, more established company that trades on a national securities exchange and has a large public float. Many of these factors are beyond our control and may decrease the market price of our common shares, regardless of our operating performance.

If and when a larger trading market for our common stock develops, the market price of our common stock is still likely to be highly volatile and subject to wide fluctuations, and you may be unable to resell your shares at or above the price at which you acquired them.

The market price of our common stock is likely to be highly volatile and could be subject to wide fluctuations in response to a number of factors that are beyond our control, including, but not limited to:

variations in our revenues and operating expenses;
actual or anticipated changes in the estimates of our operating results or changes in stock market analyst recommendations regarding our common stock, other comparable companies or our industry generally;

23


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

market conditions in our industry, the industries of our customers and the economy as a whole;
actual or expected changes in our growth rates or our competitors’ growth rates;
developments in the financial markets and worldwide or regional economies;
announcements of innovations or new products or services by us or our competitors;
announcements by the government relating to regulations that govern our industry;
sales of our common stock or other securities by us or in the open market; and
changes in the market valuations of other comparable companies.

In addition, if the market for technology stocks or the stock market in general experiences loss of investor confidence, the trading price of our common stock could decline for reasons unrelated to our business, financial condition or operating results. The trading price of our shares might also decline in reaction to events that affect other companies in our industry, even if these events do not directly affect us. Each of these factors, among others, could harm the value of your investment in our common stock. In the past, following periods of volatility in the market, securities class-action litigation has often been instituted against companies. Such litigation, if instituted against us, could result in substantial costs and diversion of management’s attention and resources, which could materially and adversely affect our business, operating results and financial condition.

Investors will incur immediate and substantial dilution as a result of this offering.

Investors purchasing shares of our common stock in this offering will incur immediate and substantial dilution in net tangible book value per share. Assuming a public offering price of $2.74 per share, purchasers of our common stock will effectively incur dilution of $2.15 per share in the net tangible book value of their purchased shares. In addition, purchasers of common stock in this offering will have contributed approximately 6% of the aggregate price paid by all purchasers of our stock but will own only approximately 16% of our common stock outstanding after this offering. Furthermore, you may experience further dilution to the extent that shares of our common stock are issued upon the exercise of outstanding stock options and warrants. See “Dilution”.

Our charter documents and Delaware law could prevent a takeover that stockholders consider favorable and could also reduce the market price of our common stock.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and our amended and restated bylaws, contain provisions that could delay or prevent a change in control of our company. These provisions could also make it more difficult for stockholders to elect directors and take other corporate actions. These provisions include:

authorizing the board to issue, without stockholder approval, preferred stock with rights senior to those of our common stock;
limiting the persons who may call special meetings of stockholders; and
requiring advance notification of stockholder nominations and proposals.

In addition, the provisions of Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law govern us. These provisions may prohibit large stockholders, in particular those owning 15% or more of our outstanding voting stock, from merging or combining with us for a certain period of time without the consent of our board of directors.

These and other provisions in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and our amended and restated bylaws, and under Delaware law, could discourage potential takeover attempts, reduce the price that investors might be willing to pay in the future for shares of our common stock and result in the market price of our common stock being lower than it would be without these provisions. See the section entitled “Description of Securities.”

Beneficial holders of common stock through the Depository Trust Company will not be legal shareholders of the Company and therefore will have no direct rights as shareholders and must act through their participating broker to exercise those rights.

The underwriters have designated Cede & Co., as nominee for the Depository Trust Company, or DTC, to hold the shares of common stock sold in this offering on behalf of, and as nominee for, the purchasers. We and DTC have no

24


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

contractual relationship. Investors who purchase the common shares (although recorded as owners within the DTC system) are legally considered holders of beneficial interests in those shares only and will have no direct rights as shareholders. Investors who purchase common stock in this offering must look solely to their participating brokerage in the DTC system for payment of dividends, the exercise of voting rights attaching to the common stock and for all other rights arising with respect to the common stock.

Under our Bylaws, the minimum notice period required to convene a general meeting is 10 calendar days. When a general meeting is convened, you may not receive sufficient notice of a shareholders’ meeting to permit you to withdraw your common stock from the DTC system to allow you to directly cast your vote with respect to any specific matter. In addition, a participating DTC brokerage firm may not be able to send voting instructions to you or carry out your voting instructions in a timely manner. We cannot assure you that you will receive voting materials in time to ensure that you can instruct your participating DTC brokerage, or its designee, to vote your shares. As a result, you may not be able to exercise your right to vote and you may lack recourse if your common stock are not voted as you requested. In addition, if you hold your shares indirectly through the DTC system, you will not be able to call a shareholder meeting.

If we are not able to comply with the applicable continued listing requirements or standards of the NASDAQ Capital Market, NASDAQ could delist our common stock.

Our common stock is currently listed on the NASDAQ Capital Market. In order to maintain that listing, we must satisfy minimum financial and other continued listing requirements and standards, including those regarding director independence and independent committee requirements, minimum stockholders' equity, minimum share price, and certain corporate governance requirements. There can be no assurances that we will be able to comply with the applicable listing standards.

As further described in “Certain Relationships and Related Transactions — Subsidiaries of Townes Tele-Communications, Inc. (“Townes Tele-Communications”),” we have a number of related party transactions with companies that are owned or controlled by our independent director, Larry Townes. Currently, we are awaiting full payment in those transactions as we are working with the purchasers to assure that the equipment meets certain technical specifications associated with their networks. Upon receiving additional payment from the purchasers, Mr. Townes may no longer be considered “independent” per the NASDAQ Listing Rule 5605(a)(2)(D), in which case we may not be compliant with NASDAQ Listing Rule 5605(b)(1), which requires the Company’s Board of Directors to be comprised of a majority of independent directors. Should we no longer be deemed compliant, NASDAQ Listing Rule 5605 provides a 180-day cure period for the Company to regain compliance with the independent director requirement.

In the event that our common stock is delisted from NASDAQ and is not eligible for quotation on another market or exchange, trading of our common stock could be conducted in the over-the-counter market or on an electronic bulletin board established for unlisted securities such as the Pink Sheets or the OTC Bulletin Board. In such event, it could become more difficult to dispose of, or obtain accurate price quotations for, our common stock, and there would likely also be a reduction in our coverage by securities analysts and the news media, which could cause the price of our common stock to decline further. Also, it may be difficult for us to raise additional capital if we are not listed on a major exchange.

In the event that our common stock is delisted from NASDAQ, U.S. broker-dealers may be discouraged from effecting transactions in shares of our common stock because they may be considered penny stocks and thus be subject to the penny stock rules.

The SEC has adopted a number of rules to regulate “penny stock” that restricts transactions involving stock which is deemed to be penny stock. Such rules include Rules 3a51-1, 15g-1, 15g-2, 15g-3, 15g-4, 15g-5, 15g-6, 15g-7, and 15g-9 under the Securities and Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”). These rules may have the effect of reducing the liquidity of penny stocks. “Penny stocks” generally are equity securities with a price of less than $5.00 per share (other than securities registered on certain national securities exchanges or quoted on the NASDAQ Stock Market if current price and volume information with respect to transactions in such securities is provided by the exchange or system). Our shares have in the past constituted, and may again in the future constitute, “penny stock” within the meaning of the rules. The additional sales practice and disclosure requirements imposed upon U.S. broker-dealers may discourage such

25


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

broker-dealers from effecting transactions in shares of our common stock, which could severely limit the market liquidity of such shares and impede their sale in the secondary market.

A U.S. broker-dealer selling penny stock to anyone other than an established customer or “accredited investor” (generally, an individual with net worth in excess of $1,000,000 or an annual income exceeding $200,000, or $300,000 together with his or her spouse) must make a special suitability determination for the purchaser and must receive the purchaser’s written consent to the transaction prior to sale, unless the broker-dealer or the transaction is otherwise exempt. In addition, the “penny stock” regulations require the U.S. broker-dealer to deliver, prior to any transaction involving a “penny stock”, a disclosure schedule prepared in accordance with SEC standards relating to the “penny stock” market, unless the broker-dealer or the transaction is otherwise exempt. A U.S. broker-dealer is also required to disclose commissions payable to the U.S. broker-dealer and the registered representative and current quotations for the securities. Finally, a U.S. broker-dealer is required to submit monthly statements disclosing recent price information with respect to the “penny stock” held in a customer’s account and information with respect to the limited market in “penny stocks”.

Stockholders should be aware that, according to SEC, the market for “penny stocks” has suffered in recent years from patterns of fraud and abuse. Such patterns include (i) control of the market for the security by one or a few broker-dealers that are often related to the promoter or issuer; (ii) manipulation of prices through prearranged matching of purchases and sales and false and misleading press releases; (iii) “boiler room” practices involving high-pressure sales tactics and unrealistic price projections by inexperienced sales persons; (iv) excessive and undisclosed bid-ask differentials and markups by selling broker-dealers; and (v) the wholesale dumping of the same securities by promoters and broker-dealers after prices have been manipulated to a desired level, resulting in investor losses. Our management is aware of the abuses that have occurred historically in the penny stock market. Although we do not expect to be in a position to dictate the behavior of the market or of broker-dealers who participate in the market, management will strive within the confines of practical limitations to prevent the described patterns from being established with respect to our securities.

We have broad discretion in the use of the net proceeds from this offering and may not use them effectively.

Our management will have broad discretion in the application of the net proceeds from this offering, including for any of the purposes described in the section of this prospectus entitled “Use of Proceeds.” The failure by our management to apply these funds effectively could harm our business. Pending their use, we may invest the net proceeds from this offering in short-term, investment-grade, interest-bearing securities. These investments may not yield a favorable return to our stockholders.

We have not paid dividends in the past and do not expect to pay dividends for the foreseeable future, and any return on investment may be limited to potential future appreciation on the value of our common stock.

We currently intend to retain any future earnings to support the development and expansion of our business and do not anticipate paying cash dividends or the shares in the foreseeable future. Our payment of any future dividends will be at the discretion of our board of directors after taking into account various factors, including without limitation, our financial condition, operating results, cash needs, growth plans and the terms of any credit agreements that we may be a party to at the time. To the extent we do not pay dividends, our shares may be less valuable because a return on investment will only occur if and to the extent our stock price appreciates, which may never occur. In addition, investors must rely on sales of their common stock after price appreciation as the only way to realize their investment, and if the price of our stock does not appreciate, then there will be no return on investment. Investors seeking cash dividends should not purchase our common stock.

Non-U.S. investors may have difficulty effecting service of process against us or enforcing judgments against us in courts of non-U.S. jurisdictions.

We are a company incorporated under the laws of the State of Delaware. All of our directors and officers reside in the United States. It may not be possible for non-U.S. investors to effect service of process within their own jurisdictions upon our company and our directors and officers. In addition, it may not be possible for non-U.S. investors to collect from our company, its directors and officers, judgments obtained in courts in such non-U.S. jurisdictions predicated on non-U.S. legislation.

26


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

If securities or industry analysts do not publish or cease publishing research or reports about us, our business or our market, or if they change their recommendations regarding our stock adversely, our shares price and trading volume could decline.

The trading market for our shares will be influenced by the research and reports that industry or securities analysts may publish about us, our business, our market or our competitors. If any of the analysts who may cover us change their recommendation regarding our stock adversely, or provide more favorable relative recommendations about our competitors, our share price would likely decline. If any analyst who may cover us were to cease coverage of our company or fail to regularly publish reports on us, we could lose visibility in the financial markets, which in turn could cause our share price or trading volume to decline.

The requirements of being a U.S. public company may strain our resources and divert management’s attention.

As a U.S. public company, we are subject to the reporting requirements of the Exchange Act, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, the Dodd-Frank Act, the listing requirements of NASDAQ, and other applicable securities rules and regulations. Compliance with these rules and regulations will increase our legal and financial compliance costs, make some activities more difficult, time-consuming, or costly, and increase demand on our systems and resources. The Exchange Act requires, among other things, that we file annual and current reports with respect to our business and operating results.

As a result of disclosure of information in this prospectus and in filings required of a public company, our business and financial condition is more visible, which we believe may result in threatened or actual litigation, including by competitors and other third parties. If such claims are successful, our business and operating results could be harmed, and even if the claims do not result in litigation or are resolved in our favor, these claims, and the time and resources necessary to resolve them, could divert resources of our management and harm our business and operating results.

27


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CAUTIONARY NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This prospectus, including the sections entitled “Risk Factors”, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Business”, contains forward-looking statements that include information relating to future events, future financial performance, strategies, expectations, our competitive environment, regulation and availability of resources. These forward-looking statements include, without limitation, statements regarding: proposed new products or services; our statements concerning litigation or other matters; statements concerning projections, predictions, expectations, estimates or forecasts for our business, financial and operating results and future economic performance; statements of management’s goals and objectives; trends affecting our financial condition, results of operations or future prospects; our financing plans or growth strategies; and other similar expressions concerning matters that are not historical facts. Words such as “may”, “will”, “should”, “could”, “would”, “predicts”, “potential”, “continue”, “expects”, “anticipates”, “future”, “intends”, “plans”, “believes” and “estimates,” and similar expressions, as well as similar statements in the future tense, identify forward-looking statements.

Forward-looking statements should not be read as a guarantee of future performance or results, and will not necessarily be accurate indications of the times at, or by which, that performance or those results will be achieved. Forward-looking statements are based on information available at the time they are made and/or management’s good faith belief as of that time with respect to future events, and are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual performance or results to differ materially from what is expressed in or suggested by the forward-looking statements.

Forward-looking statements speak only as of the date they are made. You should not put undue reliance on any forward-looking statements. We assume no obligation to update forward-looking statements to reflect actual results, changes in assumptions or changes in other factors affecting forward-looking information, except to the extent required by applicable securities laws. If we do update one or more forward-looking statements, no inference should be drawn that we will make additional updates with respect to those or other forward-looking statements.

28


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

USE OF PROCEEDS

We estimate that the net proceeds from the sale of common stock offered by us will be approximately $[    ] million, based on the public offering price of $[    ] per share, and after deducting underwriting discounts and estimated offering expenses payable by us. If the underwriters’ over-allotment option to purchase additional shares in this offering is exercised in full, we estimate that our net proceeds will be approximately $[    ] million, after deducting underwriting discounts and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

The principal purposes of this offering are to increase our capitalization and financial flexibility, and increase our visibility in the marketplace. As of the date of this prospectus, we cannot specify with certainty all of the particular uses for the net proceeds of this offering. However, we currently intend to use the net proceeds to us from this offering, together with existing cash, primarily for general corporate purposes, including working capital, product development, marketing activities, expanding our internal sales organization and further developing sales channels, funding the set-up of contract manufacturing production lines, and other capital expenditures. We may also use a portion of the net proceeds for the acquisition of, or investment in, businesses, products, technologies or other assets that complement our business, although we have no present commitments or agreements to enter into any material acquisitions or investments. We will have broad discretion over the uses of the net proceeds in this offering. Pending these uses, we intend to invest the net proceeds from this offering in short-term, investment-grade interest-bearing securities such as money market funds, certificates of deposit, commercial paper and guaranteed obligations of the U.S. government.

DIVIDEND POLICY

We have never declared dividends on our equity securities, and currently do not plan to declare dividends on shares of our common stock in the foreseeable future. We expect to retain our future earnings, if any, for use in the operation and expansion of our business. Subject to the foregoing, the payment of cash dividends in the future, if any, will be at the discretion of our board of directors and will depend upon such factors as earnings levels, capital requirements, our overall financial condition and any other factors deemed relevant by our board of directors.

29


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CAPITALIZATION

The following table sets forth our cash and cash equivalents and capitalization as of December 31, 2013:

on an actual basis;
on an as adjusted basis to give effect to the sale of 3,649,636 shares of the common stock we are offering based upon an assumed public offering price of $2.74 per share, the closing price of our common stock as listed on NASDAQ on March 31, 2014, and after deducting underwriting discounts and approximately $0.4 million in other estimated offering expenses payable by us. The as adjusted column assumes no exercise by the underwriters of their over-allotment option.

The information below is illustrative only and our capitalization following the completion of this offering will be adjusted based on the actual public price. You should read this table together with the sections entitled “Use of Proceeds” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” as well as our financial statements and the related notes, which appear elsewhere in this prospectus.

   
  As of December 31, 2013
(Unaudited)
     Actual   As Adjusted
($ in thousands)
 
Cash and cash equivalents   $ 5,517     $ 14,427  
Short-term debt
                 
Accrued interest     42       42  
Due to related party     1,526       1,526  
Deferred revenue - related party     480       480  
Obligation under capital lease     129       129  
Long-term debt
                 
Long-term obligation under capital lease     118       118  
Convertible notes payable     2,000       2,000  
Total debt and accrued interest     4,295       4,295  
Equity
                 
Convertible preferred stock, Series A: 10,000,000 shares authorized, none issued and outstanding            
Common stock, additional paid-in capital and treasury stock: 300,000,000 shares authorized, 18,682,310 shares issued and outstanding; 300,000,000 shares authorized, 22,331,946 shares issued and outstanding, as adjusted     —*       —*  
Additional paid in capital     174,000       182,910  
Accumulated deficit     (151,562 )      (151,562 ) 
Treasury stock, 2,284 shares     (22 )      (22 ) 
Total stockholders’ equity     22,416       31,326  
Total capitalization   $ 26,711     $ 35,621  

* Less than $1

30


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MARKET PRICE INFORMATION FOR OUR SECURITIES

Our shares are currently listed on NASDAQ under the symbol “XGTI”. Our shares began trading on NASDAQ on July 19, 2013 and AIM in November 20, 2006. The cancellation of trading of the Company’s common stock on the London Stock Exchange’s AIM Market under the symbols “XGTU” and “XGT” became effective January 3, 2014.

As of March 31, 2014, there were 18,800,564 shares outstanding and approximately 160 holders of record of our shares. Because shares of our common stock are held by depositories, brokers and other nominees, the number of beneficial holders of our shares is substantially larger than the number of stockholders of record.

On March 31, 2014, the closing price of our shares listed on NASDAQ was $2.74 per share.

The following table shows the high and low market prices for our shares for each fiscal quarter for the two most recent fiscal years. Market prices for our shares have fluctuated significantly. As a result, the market prices shown in the following table may not be indicative of the market prices at which our shares will trade after this offering. These prices reflect our reverse splits of our common stock undertaken in 2013.

           
  NASDAQ Share Price   XGTU Share Price   XGT Share Price
         (US Dollars)   (US Dollars)
     High   Low   High   Low   High   Low
Quarter
                                                     
First Quarter 2014**
(Through March 31, 2014)
  $ 5.01     $ 1.12       N/A       N/A       N/A       N/A  
Fourth Quarter 2013   $ 5.10     $ 1.40       5.50       1.00       10.00       10.00  
Third Quarter 2013*   $ 7.15     $ 4.60       9.00       5.50       13.00       10.00  
Second Quarter 2013     N/A       N/A       10.01       6.75       13.00       13.00  
First Quarter 2013     N/A       N/A       13.13       7.88       15.75       14.00  
Fourth Quarter 2012     N/A       N/A       14.00       7.00       26.25       14.88  
Third Quarter 2012     N/A       N/A       17.50       5.25       26.25       15.75  
Second Quarter 2012     N/A       N/A       26.25       14.00       26.25       14.00  
First Quarter 2012     N/A       N/A       28.00       17.50       22.75       15.75  

* NASDAQ trading began on July 19, 2013
** XGTU and XGT ceased trading on January 3, 2014

31


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DILUTION

The as adjusted net tangible book value of our common stock as of December 31, 2013, was approximately $13.1 million, or $0.59 per share based upon 22,331,946 shares of common stock outstanding on such date. As adjusted net tangible book value per share represents the amount of our total tangible assets reduced by the amount of our total liabilities, divided by the total number of shares of common stock outstanding after giving effect to the sale of 3,649,636 shares of the common stock we are offering based upon an assumed public offering price of $2.74 per share, the closing price of our common stock as listed on NASDAQ on March 31, 2014, and after deducting underwriting discounts and estimated offering expenses of approximately $0.4 million.

If you invest in our common stock in this offering, your interest will be diluted to the extent of the difference between the offering price per share and the as adjusted net tangible book value per share of our common stock immediately after completion after this offering. This represents an immediate increase in as adjusted net tangible book value of $0.36 per share to our existing stockholders and an immediate dilution of $2.15 per share to investors purchasing common stock in this offering.

The following table illustrates this dilution on a per share basis to new investors:

 
Assumed public offering price per share   $ 2.74  
As adjusted net tangible book value per share as of December 31, 2013 before giving effect to this offering   $ 0.23  
Increase in as adjusted net tangible book value per share attributed to new investors purchasing shares from us in this offering   $ 0.36  
As adjusted net tangible book value per share after giving effect to this offering   $ 0.59  
Dilution in as adjusted net tangible book value per share to new investors in this offering   $ 2.15  

Each $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed public offering price of $2.74 per share would increase (decrease) the net tangible book value, as adjusted to give effect to this offering, by $0.15 per share and the dilution to new investors by $0.85 per share, assuming that the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts. If the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full, the net tangible book value per share of our common stock, as adjusted to give effect to this offering, would be $0.63 per share, and the dilution as adjusted net tangible book value per share to investors in this offering would be $2.11 per share of our common stock.

The table below summarizes as of December 31, 2013, on an as adjusted basis described above, the number of shares of our common stock, the total consideration and the average price per share (i) paid to us by our existing stockholders and (ii) to be paid by new investors purchasing shares in our common stock in this offering at an assumed public offering price of $2.74 per share, the closing price of our common stock as listed on NASDAQ on March 31, 2014, before deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

         
  Shares Purchased   Total Consideration   Average Price Per Share
     Number   Percent   Amount   Percent
Existing stockholders     18,682,310       84 %    $ 161,937       94 %    $ 8.67  
New investors     3,649,636       16 %      10,000       6 %      2.74  
Total     22,331,946       100       171,937       100       7.70  

(* Dollars in thousands, except per share data)

32


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The total number of shares of our common stock reflected in the discussion and tables above is based on 18,682,310 shares of our common stock outstanding, as of December 31, 2013, and excludes:

2,284 of treasury shares; and
exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option to purchase up to an additional 547,446 shares of common stock; and
exercise of any options, warrants or conversion rights outstanding as of December 31, 2013; and
any securities, options, warrants or conversion rights issued subsequent to December 31, 2013.

To the extent that any outstanding options are exercised, new options are issued under our 2013 Long Term Incentive Plan or we issue additional shares of common stock in the future, there will be further dilution to investors participating in this offering. If all outstanding options under our 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2009 and 2013 Stock Incentive Plans and options/warrants issued outside of the stock incentive plans as of March 31, 2014 were exercised, then our existing stockholders, including the holders of these options, would own 88% and our new investors would own 12% of the total number of shares of our common stock outstanding upon the closing of this offering. In such event, the total consideration paid by our existing stockholders, including the holders of these options, would be approximately $216.8 million, or 96%, the total consideration paid by our new investors would be $10.0 million, or 4%, the average price per share paid by our existing stockholders would be $9.08 and the average price per share paid by our new investors would be $2.74.

33


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

You should read the following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations in conjunction with the financial statements and the related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. The following discussion contains forward-looking statements that reflect our plans, estimates and beliefs. Our actual results could differ materially from those discussed in the forward-looking statements. Factors that could cause or contribute to these differences include those discussed below and elsewhere in this prospectus, particularly in “Risk Factors.” The share numbers in the following discussion reflect a 1-for-25 reverse stock split that we effected March 24, 2013 as well as the 1-for-1.4 reverse stock split that we effected March 28, 2013.

Overview

We have developed a broad portfolio of innovative intellectual property to enhance wireless communications. Our intellectual property is embedded in proprietary software algorithms that offer cognitive interference mitigation and spectrum access solutions for countless applications using commercial off the shelf devices. We recently released the commercially available version of our software and hardware products using our proprietary xMax® cognitive radio technology.

Our current cognitive radio technology is based on years of product development. In 2008 and 2009, we generated material revenues from sales of our prior BSN250 voice-only products. After the introduction of various smartphones in 2007 and later that could handle both voice and data, we decided to enhance our voice-only products to include data services. In 2011, we delivered our enhanced BSN250 base station and TX70 handset for both voice and SMS services to the U.S. Army. Given the proliferation of smartphones, the U.S. Army subsequently requested that our BSN250 base station should integrate with commercial off the shelf devices. In 2013, we introduced an improved product line that could handle both voice and data services. These new products, the xAP base station and xMod and xVM modems, are able to communicate with any wi-fi enabled commercial off the shelf device. We have generated significant net losses for the past several years and we expect to continue to realize net losses for the immediate future. We estimate that we will begin generating revenues sufficient to cover the cost of our operations in late 2014.

We believe that the wireless communications industry is facing a “spectrum crisis” because the demand for flexible, affordable voice and data access continues to increase rapidly while the amount of available spectrum remains relatively constant. We have developed frequency-agnostic cognitive radio solutions to address this increasing demand by eliminating the need to acquire scarce and expensive licensed radio spectrum, and thus ideally lowering the total cost of ownership for wireless broadband access. With fast-growing demand straining network capacity, our intellectual property is also designed to help wireless broadband network operators make more efficient use of their existing spectrum allocations. We are targeting sales in numerous industries worldwide, such as telecommunications services, public safety and defense, and in markets ranging from rural to urban areas as well as expeditionary deployments.

The initial implementation of our cognitive radio intellectual property is xMax. We believe the xMax system is the only commercially available cognitive radio network system that includes our interference mitigation and spatial processing technologies. xMax implements our proprietary interference mitigation software that can increase capacity on already crowded airwaves by improving interference tolerance, enabling the delivery of higher QoS than other technologies that would not be able to cope with the interference. We believe that the xMax system will also, when operating on more than one radio channel, deliver dynamic spectrum access by using our patented self-organizing network techniques. Furthermore, the xMax system can be used to provide additional capacity to licensed spectrum by identifying and utilizing unused bandwidth within the licensed spectrum.

Our system is frequency agnostic, although currently designed to operate within the 902 – 928 MHz unlicensed band of spectrum. xMax serves as a mobile VoIP and broadband data system that utilizes an end-to-end IP system architecture. The xMax product and service suite includes access points, mobile switching centers, network management systems, deployment tools and proactive customer support. The xMax system will allow mobile operators to utilize free, unlicensed 902 – 928 MHz ISM band spectrum (which spectrum is available in all of the Americas except French Guiana) instead of purchasing scarce and expensive

34


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

licensed spectrum. Our xMax system will also enable enterprises to set up a mobile communications network in an expeditious and cost-effective manner.

We are executing on our sales and marketing strategy and have entered into direct sales agreements with end-customers and indirect sales agreements with channel network partners. These customer engagements are primarily in two of our target markets: public safety and rural telecommunications. Together, they comprise commitments to purchase xMax cognitive radio networking equipment, engineering and support services and other hardware worth approximately $34.6 million, of which the Company anticipates approximately $17.6 million to be delivered in 2014 and $17 million thereafter.

Plan of Operations

We are executing on our sales and marketing strategy and have entered into agreements both direct with end-customers as well as with indirect channel network partners. These customer engagements primarily relate to two of our target markets in rural telecommunications and defense. Together, they comprise commitments to purchase xMax® cognitive radio networking equipment, engineering services and other hardware worth approximately $34.6 million.

Result of Operations

The following table sets forth the relationship to total revenues of principal items contained in the statement of operations of the financial statements included herewith for the fiscal years ending December 31, 2013 and December 31, 2012.

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
(IN THOUSANDS EXCEPT NET LOSS PER SHARE DATA)

   
  For the Year Ended
December 31,
     2013   2012
Revenue   $ 406     $  
Cost of revenue and operating expenses
                 
Cost of components and personnel     102        
General and administrative expenses     5,501       5,543  
Development     5,468       4,806  
Stock based compensation     796       554  
Amortization and depreciation     2,370       2,063  
Total cost of revenue and operating expenses     14,237       12,966  
Loss from operations     (13,831 )      (12,966 ) 
Other income (expense)
                 
Other expense     (10,068 )          
Inducement expense     (391 )          
Interest expense, net     (2,227 )      (535 ) 
Impairment     (933 )      (286 ) 
Total other income (expense)     (13,619 )      (821 ) 
Loss before income tax provision     (27,450 )      (13,787 ) 
Income tax provision            
Net loss   $ (27,450 )    $ (13,787 ) 
Basic and diluted net loss per share     (2.86 )      (2.29 ) 
Weighted average number of shares outstanding basic and diluted     9,598       6,031  

35


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Revenue

Our revenues for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013 were $0.4 million compared to $0.0 million in fiscal 2012. The revenue of $323,000 resulted from sales of equipment and $83,000 from engineering and consulting services agreement.

Cost of Revenue and Operating Expenses

Cost of Components and Personnel

Cost of components and personnel was $0.1 million in the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to $0.0 million in fiscal 2012 as the Company recorded no revenue and thus no cost of components and personnel in the year ending December 31, 2012. Cost of components and personnel of $98,000 is based on the cost of components and the time allocated to building the products sold and $4,000 is based on the cost of the time allocated towards the engineering and consulting services agreements.

General and Administrative Expenses

General and administrative expenses are the expenses of operating the business on a daily basis and include salary and benefit expenses and payroll taxes, as well as the costs of trade shows, marketing programs, promotional materials, professional services, facilities, general liability insurance, and travel. General and administrative expenses remained the same at $5.5 million in the year ended December 31, 2013 and 2012. We had a decrease in payroll expense through an adjustment to the fair market value of the accrued bonus which was offset by an increase in a variety of expenses. Over time, we expect our administrative expenses to increase in absolute dollars due to continued growth in headcount to support our business and operations as a public company.

Development

Development expenses consist primarily of salary and benefit expenses and payroll taxes, as well as costs for prototypes, facilities and travel. Development expenses increased $0.7 million, or 14%, from $4.8 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 to $5.5 million in the year ended December 31, 2013.

The increases are due to additional costs related to producing and testing equipment as the Company’s products became available for sale on September 30, 2013. Over time, we expect our development costs to increase as we continue making significant investments in developing new products and working on enhancement of our technology with existing products.

Stock Based Compensation

Stock based compensation increased $0.3 million, or 45%, from $0.5 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 to $0.8 million in the year ended December 31, 2013. The increase arose from the increase in the number of employees and directors of the Company who received option grants in fiscal 2013.

We had approximately $1.2 million of unrecognized stock-based compensation expense related to unvested stock options, net of estimated forfeitures, as of December 31, 2013, which we expect to be recognized over the next three years.

Amortization and Depreciation

Amortization and depreciation expenses increased $0.3 million, or 14.3%, from $2.1 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 to $2.4 million in the year ended December 31, 2013. The increase is attributed to the xMax products becoming available for sale as of September 30, 2013. As of this date, the Company began to amortize all capitalized costs associated with these products for the remainder of the year. The Company did not take amortization on these products during 2012.

Other Income (Expense)

Other expenses were $13.6 million and $0.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Approximately $10.1 million of the increase is a result of the independent directors of the Company authorizing a onetime agreement on September 30, 2013, whereby we issued to MBTH 1,599,453 shares of our common stock and a warrant to purchase 1,363,636 shares of our common stock at an exercise price of $6.87 per share for the difference in price between the shares issued to them in March 2013 at a price

36


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

of $13.30 per share in exchange for the conversion of its 2011 Convertible Note and the $5.50 purchase price for shares sold in our initial public offering in July 2013. Additionally, the Modified Strike Price, agreed upon between the Company and MBTH in January 2013, of $13.30 per share for the two options representing 571,428 underlying shares granted to MBTH in February 2011 has been lowered to $5.50.

Inducement expense for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $0.4 million. The inducement expense represents the estimated fair value of warrants given to non-related parties in relation with the conversion of the Bridge Loan.

Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $2.2 million compared to $0.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, an increase of $1.7 million or 316%. The increase was partially due to the higher interest and fees incurred on the Bridge Loan for 2013 compared to the May 2011 Convertible note in 2012; the fee was amortized over a shorter period of one year based on the contractual obligation of the Bridge Loan; $0.7 million from the six month minimum interest recorded in connection with the increase interest rate; $0.4 million from the accretion of the debt discount recorded as interest expense; and $0.6 million in interest expense resulted from the Bridge Loan being convertible into new shares at 95% of the price of any future equity financing due to the difference between the IPO price of $5.50 and $5.225 in 2013.

Impairment charges for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $896,000 for property & equipment and $37,000 for intangible assets. For the year ended December 31, 2012, $18,000 was related to intangible assets and $268,000 for property & equipment.

Net Loss

For the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company had a net loss of $27.5 million, as compared to a net loss of $13.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, or an increase of $13.7 million. The increase in net loss is due mainly to the one-time agreement with MBTH and increases of inducement expense and interest expenses discussed above.

Deferred Revenue — Related Party

On October 16, 2013, the Company completed the first delivery of our xMax comprehensive cognitive radio system, shipping equipment required to fulfill the $155,000 purchase order that was received from rural broadband provider Walnut Hill Telephone Company on November 26, 2012. Larry Townes is Chairman of Townes Tele-Communications, Inc., the parent company of Walnut Hill Telephone Company. Given that Larry Townes is a director of xG Technology, the sale of equipment to Walnut Hill Telephone Company is considered to be a related party transaction. Due to Walnut Hill Telephone Company waiting for the equipment to meet certain technical specifications, the revenue from this transaction is considered deferred revenue as of December 31, 2013.

On December 16, 2013, the Company sold our xMax comprehensive cognitive radio system to Haxtun Telephone Company for $301,000 to fulfill a purchase order that was received on November 24, 2012. Larry Townes is Chairman of Townes Tele-Communications, Inc., the parent company of Haxtun Telephone Company. Given that Larry Townes is a director of xG Technology, the sale of equipment to Haxtun Telephone Company is considered to be a related party transaction. Due to Haxtun Telephone Company waiting for the equipment to meet certain technical specifications, the revenue from this transaction is considered deferred revenue as of December 31, 2013.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

Our operations primarily have been funded through cash generated by financing. Cash comprises cash in hand and demand deposits. Our cash balances were as follows:

   
  December 31,
     2013 $’000   2012 $’000
Cash     5,517       271  

Our operations primarily have been funded through cash generated by debt and equity financing. During 2013, the Company relied upon additional investment through proceeds from the IPO, Second Offering, Bridge Loan and convertible notes payable.

37


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

We have incurred net losses of $27.5 million and $13.8 million in the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Additionally, we have incurred negative operating cash flows including cash used in operations of $14.4 million and $5.6 million in the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Of the $14.4 million, approximately $10.1 million was a result of the independent directors of the Company authorizing a onetime agreement on September 30, 2013, whereby we issued to MBTH 1,599,453 shares of our common stock and a warrant to purchase 1,363,636 shares of our common stock at an exercise price of $6.87 per share for the difference in price between the shares issued to them in March 2013 at a price of $13.30 per share in exchange for the conversion of its 2011 Convertible Note and the $5.50 purchase price for shares sold in our initial public offering in July 2013.

Our future capital requirements may vary materially from those currently planned and will depend on many factors, including our rate of revenue growth, the timing and extent of spending to support development efforts, the timing of new product introductions, market acceptance of our products and overall economic conditions. The ability of the Company to continue as a going concern is dependent upon its ability to raise additional capital, obtain other means of financing, and to fulfill its existing backlog. As of March 31, 2014, the Company has a total backlog of $34.6 million. Our ability to recognize revenue, and ultimately cash receipts, on the existing backlog is contingent upon, but not limited to, acceptable performance of the delivered equipment and services.

Initial Public Offering

On July 24, 2013, the Company closed its initial public offering of 1,337,792 shares of common stock, par value $0.00001 per share, and warrants to purchase 668,896 shares of common stock, at a purchase price to the public of $5.50 per share and $0.01 per warrant, for net proceeds to the Company, after deducting underwriter discounts and offering expenses, of $6,750,673. The warrants have an exercise price of $6.87 per share, are exercisable immediately and will expire five years from the date of issuance. Feltl and Company and Aegis Capital Corp acted as joint underwriters for the offering.

Over-allotment Option

On August 19, 2013, the underwriters exercised in full their over-allotment option to purchase an additional 200,668 shares of common stock and warrants to purchase 100,334 shares of common stock with an exercise price of $6.87, at a purchase price to the public of $5.50 per share and $0.01 per warrant, for net proceeds to the Company, after deducting underwriter discounts, of $1,027,349.

Convertible Notes Payable

During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company drew down $450,000 under the convertible notes payable to related party, compared to $10.3 million for 2012. On January 16, 2013, principal in excess of $15 million and any accrued interest and fees related to the Convertible notes were converted into the Bridge Loan balance discussed below.

Bridge Loan

During 2013, the Company drew down $5.0 million under the Bridge Loan. On August 22, 2013, the Company refinanced approximately $1,013,000 of liabilities previously paid by MBTH during 2013 on behalf of the Company through the Bridge Loan and incurred an origination fee of approximately $50,000. On August 7, 2013, the Company repaid $125,000 to a non-related investor for investment into the Bridge Loan.

On August 22, 2013, the Company issued 2,187,529 common shares for the conversion of the balance of approximately $11,429,000 in principal and accrued interest and fees at a price per share of $5.225.

Secondary Offering

On November 18, 2013, the Company closed its secondary public offering of 5,715,000 shares of common stock, par value $0.00001 per share, at a purchase price to the public of $1.75 per share, for net proceeds to the Company, after deducting underwriter discounts and offering expenses, of $9,146,888. In connection with the offering, the Company issued warrants to the underwriters to purchase 171,450 shares of common stock, for an aggregate price of $100. The warrants have an exercise price of $2.1875 per share and are exercisable immediately and will expire five years from the date of issuance.

38


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Over-allotment Option

On December 12, 2013, the underwriters made a partial exercise of their over-allotment option in which they purchased an additional 255,000 shares of common stock at a purchase price to the public of $1.75 per share, for net proceeds to the Company, after deducting underwriter discounts, of $415,013. The underwriters had an option to purchase up to 857,250 shares of common stock or 15% of the total number of shares offered within 45 days after the closing of the Offering.

Cash Flows

The following table sets forth the major components of our statements of cash flows data for the periods presented.

   
  Year Ended
December 31, 2013
$’000
  Year Ended
December 31, 2012
$’000
Net cash used in operating activities     (14,395 )      (5,561 ) 
Net cash used in investment activities     (2,896 )      (5,006 ) 
Net cash inflow from financing activities     22,537       10,705  
Net increase in cash     5,246       138  

Operating Activities

Net cash used in operating activities for the year ended December 31, 2013 totaled $14.4 million as compared to $5.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2012. Of the $14.4 million, approximately $10.1 million was a result of the independent directors of the Company authorizing a onetime agreement on September 30, 2013, whereby we issued to MBTH 1,599,453 shares of our common stock and a warrant to purchase 1,363,636 shares of our common stock at an exercise price of $6.87 per share for the difference in price between the shares issued to them in March 2013 at a price of $13.30 per share in exchange for the conversion of its 2011 Convertible Note and the $5.50 purchase price for shares sold in our initial public offering in July 2013. The cash used in operating activities consisted principally of the net loss from operations.

Investing Activities

Net cash used in investing activities for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $2.9 million as compared to $5.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2012. This represents capital expenditures primarily associated with the investment in product and technology development and our patent portfolio.

We have invested in product and technology development and our patent portfolio, with $2.6 million accounted for as investment in intangible assets in the year ended December 31, 2013, and $4.5 million in the year ended December 31, 2012. In addition, the Company’s investment in property and equipment, comprising the purchase of testing and manufacturing equipment, of $0.3 million in the year ended December 31, 2013 decreased by $0.2 million, or 43%, from $0.5 million in the year ended December 31, 2012.

Financing Activities

Our net cash provided by financing activities for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $22.5 million as compared to $10.7 million for 2012, which primarily consisted of proceeds from further advances under convertible promissory notes issued by the Company and proceeds from issuance of common stock. The Company raised $7.8 million through the IPO and IPO over allotment, $9.6 million through the second offering and second offering over allotment, drew down $5.0 million under the Bridge Loan and $0.5 million under the convertible notes payable to related party during 2013. Also note holders converted the May 2011 shareholders note of $15 million and the Bridge Loan of $11.4 million during 2013.

During the year ended December 31, 2012, net financing activities consisted primarily of proceeds from further advances under the May 2011 Shareholder Loan. Proceeds from convertible promissory notes issued to MBTH under the May 2011 Shareholder Loan totaled $10.3 million. Proceeds from the issuance of new shares amounted to $0.4 million.

Subsequent Events

The cancellation of the Company’s common stock on the London Stock Exchange’s AIM Market became effective January 3, 2014.

39


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

On January 7, 2014, the Company received $1,350,000 from MBTH. As of December 31, 2013, this amount was recorded as a due from a related party.

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

As of December 31, 2013 and 2012 we had no off-balance sheet arrangements.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

The Company does not believe that recently issued accounting pronouncements will have a material impact on its financial statements.

Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

Critical accounting estimates are those that management deems to be most important to the portrayal of our financial condition and results of operations, and that require management’s most difficult, subjective or complex judgments, due to the need to make estimates about the effects of matters that are inherently uncertain. We have identified our critical accounting estimates which are discussed below.

Use of Estimates

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, disclosures of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and revenue and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates. The Company’s significant estimates include the valuation of stock based charges and the valuation of inventory reserves.

Accounts Receivable

The Company extends credit to its customers. Accounts receivable are recorded at the invoiced amount and do not bear interest. The allowance for doubtful accounts is the Company’s best estimate for the amount of probable credit losses in the Company’s existing accounts receivable. The Company establishes an allowance of doubtful accounts based upon factors surrounding the credit risk of specific customers and other information. Receivable balances are reviewed on an aged basis and account balances are charged off against the allowance after all means of collection have been exhausted and the potential for recovery is considered remote. The Company does not require collateral on accounts receivable.

Intangible Assets

Capitalized software costs incurred in the design and development of software for sale to others as a separate product or embedded in a product and sold as part of the product as a whole are charged to expense until technological feasibility is established, and amortized on a straight-line basis over five years, beginning when the products are offered for sale or the enhancements are integrated into the products. Management is required to use its judgment in determining whether capitalized software costs meet the criteria for immediate expense or capitalization, in accordance with GAAP. The unamortized capitalized costs of a computer software product are compared to the net realizable value of that product and any excess is written off.

The significant estimates and assumptions involved in determining the net realizable value of our capitalized software costs are the estimated future cash flows from the product, which are the estimated future gross revenues reduced by the estimated future costs of completing the product including the costs of maintenance. These estimates are based upon anticipated results and trends including customer demand for the Company’s products and the necessary skill level and man-hours needed to complete the products. The Company believes these estimates are reasonable under the current circumstances. The risk of material misstatement of these accounting estimates varies with the subjectivity associated with these estimates; including the assumption the Company has the know-how to create such products and the availability of relevant personnel to complete such products that customer’s desire. By their nature, estimates are subject to an inherent degree of uncertainty. Actual results may differ from management’s estimates.

Patent and licenses are measured initially at purchase cost and are amortized on a straight line basis over their useful lives which range between 18.5 to 20 years.

40


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Revenue Recognition

The Company recognizes revenues when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, services have been rendered, the price is fixed and determinable, and collectability is reasonably assured. Revenues from management and consulting, time-and-materials service contracts, maintenance agreements and other services are recognized as the services are provided or at the time the goods are shipped and title as passed.

Commitments and Contingencies

Except as otherwise disclosed elsewhere in this document, we have no material commitments or contingent liabilities. The Company has an employment contract with its CEO that would require a one-year severance payment in the event the Company terminates his services under certain circumstances.

Warranties and Indemnifications

The Company recognizes estimated costs related to warranty activities upon product shipment. The recorded amount will be adjusted from time to time for specifically identified warranty exposure. Actual warranty expenses are charged against the Company’s estimated warranty liability when incurred.

We may in the future enter into standard indemnification agreements with many of our distributors and OEMs, as well as certain other business partners in the ordinary course of business. These agreements may include provisions for indemnifying the distributor, OEM or other business partner against any claim brought by a third party to the extent any such claim alleges that an xMax® product infringes a patent, copyright or trademark or violates any other proprietary rights of that third party. The maximum amount of potential future indemnification is unlimited. The maximum potential amount of future payments we could be required to make under these indemnification agreements is not estimable.

Based upon our historical experience and information known as of March 31, 2014, we do not believe it is likely that we currently have significant liability for the above indemnities.

41


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

BUSINESS

Overview

We have developed a broad portfolio of innovative intellectual property to enhance wireless communications. Our intellectual property is embedded in proprietary software algorithms that offer cognitive interference mitigation and spectrum access solutions for countless applications using commercial off the shelf devices. We recently released the commercially available version of our software and hardware products using our proprietary xMax cognitive radio technology.

Our current cognitive radio technology is based on years of product development. In 2008 and 2009, we generated material revenues from sales of our prior BSN250 voice-only products. After the introduction of various smartphones in 2007 and later that could handle both voice and data, we decided to enhance our voice-only products to include data services. In 2011, we delivered our enhanced BSN250 base station and TX70 handset for both voice and SMS services to the U.S. Army. Given the proliferation of smartphones, the U.S. Army subsequently requested that our BSN250 base station should integrate with commercial off the shelf devices. In 2013, we introduced an improved product line that could handle both voice and data services. These new products, the xAP base station and xMod and xVM modems, are able to communicate with any wi-fi enabled commercial off the shelf device. We have generated significant net losses for the past several years and we expect to continue to realize net losses for the immediate future. We estimate that we will begin generating revenues sufficient to cover the cost of our operations in late 2014.

We believe that the wireless communications industry is facing a “spectrum crisis” because the demand for flexible, affordable voice and data access continues to increase rapidly while the amount of available spectrum remains relatively constant. We have developed frequency-agnostic cognitive radio solutions to address this increasing demand by eliminating the need to acquire scarce and expensive licensed radio spectrum, and thus ideally lowering the total cost of ownership for wireless broadband access. With fast-growing demand straining network capacity, our intellectual property is also designed to help wireless broadband network operators make more efficient use of their existing spectrum allocations. We are targeting sales in numerous industries worldwide, such as telecommunications services, public safety and defense, and in markets ranging from rural to urban areas as well as expeditionary deployments.

The initial implementation of our cognitive radio intellectual property is xMax. We believe the xMax system is the only commercially available cognitive radio network system that includes our interference mitigation and spatial processing technologies. xMax implements our proprietary interference mitigation software that can increase capacity on already crowded airwaves by improving interference tolerance, enabling the delivery of higher Quality of Service (“QoS”) than other technologies that would not be able to cope with the interference. We believe that the xMax system will also, when operating on more than one radio channel, deliver dynamic spectrum access by using our patented self-organizing network techniques. Furthermore, the xMax system can be used to provide additional capacity to licensed spectrum by identifying and utilizing unused bandwidth within the licensed spectrum.

Our system is frequency agnostic, although currently designed to operate within the 902 – 928 MHz unlicensed band of spectrum. xMax serves as a mobile voice over internet protocol (“VoIP”) and broadband data system that utilizes an end-to-end Internet Protocol (“IP”) system architecture. The xMax product and service suite includes access points, mobile switching centers, network management systems, deployment tools and proactive customer support. The xMax system will allow mobile operators to utilize free, unlicensed 902 – 928 MHz ISM band spectrum (which spectrum is available in all of the Americas except French Guiana) instead of purchasing scarce and expensive licensed spectrum. Our xMax system will also enable enterprises to set up a mobile communications network in an expeditious and cost-effective manner.

42


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Below is a diagram that provides a high-level overview of the xMax® network architecture:

[GRAPHIC MISSING]

We are executing on our sales and marketing strategy and have entered into direct sales agreements with end-customers and indirect sales agreements with channel network partners. These customer engagements are primarily in two of our target markets: public safety and rural telecommunications. Together, they comprise commitments to purchase xMax cognitive radio networking equipment, engineering and support services and other hardware worth approximately $34.6 million, of which the Company anticipates approximately $17.6 million to be delivered in 2014 and $17 million thereafter.

As of the date of this prospectus, 39.70% of the shares of our common stock are beneficially owned by MBTH. MBTH was co-founded in 2010 by Rick Mooers, Roger Branton and George Schmitt in order to invest in, and provide expertise, guidance and other support to, us. Roger Branton, our Chief Financial Officer, and George Schmitt, our Executive Chairman, are directors of MBTH, and Richard Mooers, a director of our Company, is the CEO and a director of MBTH. MBMG, a merchant bank owned by family entities or trusts related to Richard Mooers and Roger Branton, has a 45.23% ownership interest in MBTH as of March 31, 2014. George Schmitt has a direct 36.34% ownership interest in MBTH as of March 31, 2014, and has been granted an option to purchase MBTH shares sufficient to give him an additional 5% ownership interest in MBTH. Since its founding, MBTH has provided xG Technology with significant financial and other support, including $7.8 million of indebtedness under the promissory note issued by us to MBTH pursuant to a subscription agreement dated January 16, 2013 (together, the “Bridge Loan”). On July 18, 2013, MBTH, along with other investors, exchanged the outstanding Bridge Loan for 2,187,529 shares of our common stock and warrants to purchase an additional 1,093,778 shares, in full satisfaction of the Bridge Loan. For further details on the financial support given by MBTH to us and other transactions and arrangements between us and MBTH, please see the section entitled “Related Party Transactions — Other Transactions”.

Our Strengths

We believe the following strengths position us for sustainable growth:

Our proprietary xMax cognitive radio technology.  We have developed our xMax cognitive radio technology to create a turnkey network solution. This solution encompasses the key elements of our cognitive technology, including spectrum sensing, spectrum management, spectrum mobility, spectrum sharing and spatial processing. Our software and hardware products and our end-to-end IP architecture implement this solution to provide quality VoIP and data services for countless applications and commercial off the shelf devices.
Our technology addresses an expanding market need.  Our market opportunity has accelerated and expanded due to the spectrum crisis and the stated goals of governmental organizations to increase spectrum access. Our cognitive technology allows mobile wireless networks to provide quality voice and data services using unlicensed spectrum, and our interference mitigation and spatial processing techniques enable these services even in crowded or shared spectrum bands. Rural telecommunication providers, public safety agencies, industrial and enterprise users, and those who

43


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

use unlicensed spectrum can use our products and services to create wireless networks without the significant capital outlays and delays required to license spectrum.
Our solutions meet the specific needs of targeted markets.  Our cognitive radio technology has been specifically developed to make our entire network infrastructure mobile, so that it can be rapidly deployed in response to public safety or security threats. We believe this feature differentiates our technology from that of our competitors and will address a major capability gap for public safety, defense, homeland security and news agencies. In addition, the expanded range of our network can provide improved voice and data services for underserved rural markets.
We have a broad patent portfolio and unencumbered use of our intellectual property.  We maintain a broad patent portfolio consisting of patents and patent applications in the United States and many international jurisdictions, which include 49 issued U.S. patents and 64 issued international patents. We have solely funded the development of our intellectual property, which is, accordingly, unencumbered by any federal government unlimited use licenses.
We have an accomplished leadership team.  Our management team and board of directors brings a wealth of experience in the telecommunications and military sectors as well as hardware and software development. Our engineering team has a strong track record developing ad-hoc networking domains at Motorola and Mesh Networks. In addition, most of our leadership team has strong ties to our target markets, including public safety organizations, rural telecommunications companies and the military.

Our Strategy

We are developing a broad portfolio of innovative intellectual property that we believe will enhance wireless communications. Leveraging elements of our intellectual property portfolio, we plan to introduce a range of spectrum agnostic, cognitive radio solutions that span numerous industries and applications. We believe that these products, together with our ability to leverage our patent portfolio, present us with an attractive revenue model. Our strategy is initially to commercialize our intellectual property portfolio by developing and selling network equipment using our proprietary software algorithms to offer cognitive interference mitigation and spectrum access solutions. In the future, our strategy is for our intellectual property to be embedded by partners in a semiconductor chip that could be sold to third party equipment manufacturers and inserted in their devices and to license our intellectual property to other customers in vertical markets world-wide. Our technology roadmap currently projects this transition to begin in 2016.

Market Overview

Our Market

We are witnessing rapidly increasing demand in the marketplace for mobile bandwidth. The surge in demand is attributable to the proliferation of smartphones, tablet PCs and other broadband-centric devices, as well as the shift to data and video-intensive services. A Cisco report (the Cisco Visual Networking Index, February 2012) indicates that in 2011 more than 50% of the data traffic on mobile networks was video, and they forecast video traffic to account for over 70% of total mobile data traffic by 2016.

There has also been an increase in mobile voice demand as more people unplug their wired phones and rely on wireless devices for all of their calling needs. According to Cisco’s report, as well as several studies undertaken by the Federal Communications Commission (“FCC”), the demand for wireless services will continue to grow in the coming years, as shown in the chart below. Cisco predicts mobile data traffic will increase 18-fold between 2011 and 2016, a 78% CAGR, reaching 10.8 billion Gigabytes per month.

44


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

[GRAPHIC MISSING]

Source: Mobile Broadband: The Benefits of Additional Spectrum (FCC Report 10/2010)

In early 2009, Congress directed the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) to develop a National Broadband Plan to ensure every American has “access to broadband capability.” After conducting thirty-six public workshops and engaging in significant collaboration and conversations with other government agencies and Congress, the FCC released the National Broadband Plan in early 2010. Within the Plan the FCC acknowledges that “the current spectrum policy framework sometimes impedes the free flow of spectrum to its most highly valued uses.” The Plan states that “Wireless broadband is poised to become a key platform for innovation in the U.S. over the next decade. As a result, U.S. spectrum policy requires reform to accommodate the new ways that industry is delivering wireless services. These reforms include making more spectrum available on a flexible basis, including for unlicensed and opportunistic uses.”

Specific recommendations within the report that indicate a favorable regulatory environment for cognitive radio technology include: “Recommendation 5.13: The FCC should spur further development and deployment of opportunistic uses across more radio spectrum.” The Plan further states that, “the FCC and NTIA should take steps to expand the environment in which new, opportunistic technologies can be developed and improved. And “The FCC should allow opportunistic radios to operate on spectrum currently held by the FCC (such as in certain license areas where spectrum was not successfully auctioned).”

On March 27, 2012 the U.S. Department of Commerce, through the NTIA, released a report in which they announced, “In the past, the federal government has freed up spectrum for exclusive commercial use by clearing a spectrum band of federal users, who typically relocated to other bands. However, given the growing demand for spectrum by both industry and the federal agencies, it is increasingly difficult to find desirable spectrum that can be vacated by federal users as well as spectrum in which to relocate these federal users. Due to the scarcity of spectrum, the complexity of federal operations, and the time and cost of relocating federal users, the old approach alone is no longer feasible.”

The report further states “NTIA proposes a new path forward for spectrum repurposing that relies on a combination of relocating federal users and sharing spectrum between federal agencies and commercial users. Spectrum sharing will be a vital component to satisfying the growing demand for spectrum, and federal and non-federal users will need to adopt innovative spectrum-sharing techniques to accommodate this demand.”

In July 2012, The President’s Council of Advisors on Science and Technology (PCAST) issued a report to the US President titled “Realizing the Full Potential of Government-Held Spectrum to Spur Economic Growth” in which “It concludes that the traditional practice of clearing government-held spectrum of Federal users and auctioning it for commercial use is not sustainable. In light of changes made possible by modern technology, we recommend that you issue a new Memorandum that states it is the policy of the U.S. government to share

45


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

underutilized spectrum to the maximum extent consistent with the Federal mission, and requires the Secretary of Commerce to identify 1,000 MHz of Federal spectrum in which to implement shared-use spectrum pilot projects.” The report noted that simply clearing and reallocating spectrum would not be sustainable and pointed to a recent study by the National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA) which found that clearing of just one 95 MHz band will take 10 years, cost $18 billion, and cause significant disruption. Among its key recommendations are to adopt new technologies, including cognitive radios, that could help use existing spectrum more efficiently, stating that “the use of new radio technologies, including cognitive radios, will be an important tool in helping increase spectrum capacity and utilization”. The PCAST authors stated that agile (cognitive) radio technologies that make it possible for computerized radio systems to share spectrum on a vastly more efficient basis would make it possible to move from an era of scarcity to one of abundance.

Moreover, on July 6, 2012 a Presidential Executive Order was issued regarding the Assignment of National Security and Emergency Preparedness Communications Functions. The order establishes that the federal government must be able to communicate with the public, other agencies, other levels of government and businesses “at all times and circumstances” and in all locations, both domestically and internationally. To ensure this, the order mandates the establishment of emergency communications capabilities that are “survivable, resilient, enduring and effective”. These capabilities are not available in traditional public system networks, but the xMax® cognitive radio system has been designed from the ground up to meet the very survivability, redundancy, mobility, interoperability, and resiliency requirements specified by this Order.

Recognizing the spectrum constraints on fast growing needs for wireless connectivity, in September 2012 the European Commission published a communication promoting the shared use of radio spectrum resources. A study conducted for the European Commission showed that finding additional shared spectrum resources for wireless broadband could create significant net economic benefits for the European Union. With an increase of between 200 to 400 MHz in shared access spectrum for wireless broadband, the scenarios evaluated in the study showed a net increase in the value to the European economy of the order of several hundred billion Euros by 2020. The Commission, therefore, proposed steps to foster the development of wireless innovations in the EU to ensure that the currently allocated spectrum is exploited to the fullest extent possible. This has been followed by Ofcom, the telecommunications regulator in the UK, moving to complete the process to release TV Whites Spaces for shared use.

While it appears to management that spectrum regulation is developing in a favorable manner, we have, nonetheless, chosen to release the initial xMax® product line on the unlicensed 900 MHz ISM band (902 – 928 MHz) in order to minimize our exposure to regulatory risk (see further under the section entitled “Government Regulations, Regulators’ Role in spectrum”). The unlicensed bands are well established and although these bands are allocated for Industrial Scientific and Medical (ISM) use (e.g., microwave ovens and industrial equipment), a major use has been unlicensed (Part 15) systems such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and ZigBee. In the period 1995 – 2005, most of the cordless phones marketed in the US were in the 902 – 928 MHz band, but conflicts with the other uses and availability of DECT equipment has greatly decreased sales of 902 – 928 MHz cordless phones.

The rules for these bands sprung from FCC Docket 81-413 which sought to end an implicit prohibition of spread spectrum/CDMA technology that resulted from a focus on FDMA spectrum uses. This resulted in rules adopted in 1985 that allow unlicensed spread spectrum systems to use these bands for almost any possible application subject to a 1W power limit. When wireless LAN use became of interest several years later, these time-tested rules allowed U.S. market access without FCC deliberations. The 2.4 and 5.8 GHz bands are used for Wi-Fi today. In a similar fashion, we are launching our initial software-defined product offering programmed to operate on unlicensed spectrum in order to speed commercialization of our intellectual property without requiring FCC or NTIA deliberations on opportunistic access. Because we have designed our core technology to be usable beyond the unlicensed band that its initial product offering operates on, we believes that we are well positioned to benefit from possible future regulatory reforms that support wider spread use of spectrum sharing and opportunistic access techniques.

The growth of wireless data over the past few years has made the subject of available spectrum a pressing priority. In fact, the current situation has been referred to as a “looming spectrum crisis”. (FCC Chairman

46


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Julius Genachowski, speech to CTIA, October 2009). Responses to this “crisis” have included lobbying efforts to persuade the FCC to find new sources of licensed spectrum and proposals to reallocate existing licensed spectrum. Demand for more spectrum and capacity has also been a key factor in industry consolidation. The rationale given for the AT&T/Cingular merger was based on the fact that AT&T had more spectrum than Cingular, and by combining the companies they could more efficiently serve their customers. Likewise, Verizon’s $3.6 billion bidding to buy unused wireless spectrum and AT&T’S $39 billion attempt to acquire T-Mobile was primarily driven by AT&T’s desire to secure additional spectrum and cell sites in order to provide more capacity across its network.

Our company and our technology and products are based on our belief that there is insufficient spectrum available to satisfy the current and future growth of wireless data. However, we also believe that this crisis is not solely a result of insufficient amounts of available spectrum, but also the result of inefficient use of the currently available spectrum. Rather than merely demanding more spectrum we believe that the more appropriate response to the call for increased bandwidth would be to shift the focus to getting more use out of spectrum that has already been allocated. More effective utilization of the available spectrum can be accomplished in a number of different ways. Advancements in radio technology, such as the movement to the LTE standard from the previous 3G networks, for example, have allowed for better spectrum utilization. This has been attributed to the incorporation of new advanced technologies such as multiple in, multiple out (“MIMO”) and Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple to reduce multiuser interference.

Other methods being employed by network operators to meet bandwidth requirements have included off-loading some of the demand to unlicensed Wi-Fi hotspots and selling in-building femtocells that make use of a customer’s own wired Internet connection. Another approach is to build more cell sites closer together. Each cell site would cover a smaller area, and thus offer the ability to reuse frequencies more times in a larger geographic coverage area. However, such would entail more costs, and is time consuming due to local permitting and other considerations. Many of these approaches have been driven by the need to receive more capacity out of limited spectrum.

While the spectrum currently available cannot satisfy the future growth of wireless data, the idea of getting better use out of spectrum (both licensed and unlicensed) by sharing it is receiving increased attention as a more effective and efficient solution for the industry than simply identifying new spectrum. This has led to industry and policy makers to consider technology-based approaches, such as cognitive radio and opportunistic (i.e. shared) spectrum use.

Users of commercial cellular networks are not the only users that are running out of capacity due to spectrum limitations. Wireless users around the globe such as industrial and enterprise users, public safety agencies and those who use unlicensed spectrum (such as Wi-Fi and White Spaces) are also lacking necessary spectrum, but are not being allocated the necessary spectrum due to the fact that regulators have historically prioritized commercial mobile carriers in the allocation of spectrum assets as the demand for both voice and broadband access continues to increase.

We believe that deployment of cognitive radio networks offers the best solution to addressing the pressing need for more efficient use of spectrum.

Radio Spectrum — A Primer

Radio spectrum is a finite resource. In order to utilize this limited radio spectrum better, we have essentially been limited to reallocating swaths held by existing users, who either have to lose some of their spectrum or have to move to other portions of the band.

The best spectrum for two-way radio or cellular types of communications is in lower frequencies. These frequencies are scarce due to technical, historical, and regulatory reasons. A large part of the spectrum (30MHz to 900MHz) that is well suited for cellular and land mobile radio (“LMR”) is occupied by existing business, industrial, public safety, and other license holders. Additionally, only a fraction of this spectrum is practical for mobile commercial consumption as the usage of lower frequencies requires antennas, filters and other components that do not fit into a portable handheld device. There are also many services that have long used valuable spectrum in frequencies that could be reassigned for mobile data and voice since those services could use some other spectrum efficiently.

47


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The availability of widespread high-speed wireless broadband has led to customer uptake that was far greater than the network operators, device manufacturers, and application developers had predicted. The introduction of the iPhone by Apple was a starting point for soaring broadband wireless service demand, and since that time, new applications, including streaming video for TV and movie services, have proliferated. Network operators are struggling with how to keep up with this demand. AT&T reported that 4% of its iPhone customers were accounting for more than 50% of the data traffic on its 3G network, and a Cisco report indicates that today more than 50% of the data traffic on mobile networks is video. This trend is expected to accelerate as network operators begin deploying 4G (fourth-generation cellular services). However, 4G does not fully address the current spectrum issues, and in fact may make it worse as new bandwidth and spectrum-intensive services are brought to market.

Cognitive Radio Networks — A Primer

The industry definition of a cognitive radio is a device that, unlike a traditional radio, can dynamically find and use available frequency to improve throughput and connectivity. This can be done via real-time sensing that allows the radio to scan for unused frequencies and then instantly tune to such frequencies. Cognitive radios can also rely on a database that can tell it what channels are available (usually based on the radio’s location and known spectrum restrictions in that area).

Either or both of these techniques can be used to help the cognitive radio avoid interference and optimize its throughput and connection reliability on a dynamic basis. With detailed information about its local radio frequency (“RF”) environment, cognitive radios are able to change power output, frequency and receive or transmit parameters, in order to extract latent (unused) bandwidth and capacity from crowded unlicensed, as well as underutilized licensed, wireless spectrum.

The key elements of cognitive radio technology include spectrum sensing, spectrum management, spectrum mobility, spectrum sharing, and spatial processing:

Spectrum sensing may be defined as interference-based detection of transmitters with the ability to look at a portion of the spectrum to see if it contains any transmitters that could cause interference to the cognitive radio system. Making the end user devices and network infrastructure cognitive enables both to dynamically react to a wide range of conditions. In the xMax® system, the end user radio is used to inform the network of changes in the RF environment, core infrastructure and other relevant conditions. This allows the network itself, and not just the radios, to adapt dynamically. When only the radio itself is cognitive, each radio will individually optimize its parameters and throughput based on local conditions, without regard to overall system performance. What may be optimal for the radios on an individual basis may not lead to overall network optimization in terms of coverage, throughput or other measures.

Spectrum management is the ability of the system to capture the best available spectrum for use at any given point in time. It is based on the premise that both terminals and base stations can be directed to change their operating frequencies dynamically as needed to keep the communications from interfering with others in that portion of the spectrum, or of being interfered with by others in the same spectrum. By propagating and collecting data from individual radios across the network, a cognitive system approach can make the entire network smarter, and optimize total network throughput. This enables new and useful features such as self-RF planning that can simplify, and reduce the cost of, the deployment and operation of the network. After the RF data is collected, better utilization and performance can be achieved automatically and continuously. This makes the network vastly more adaptable, self-sustaining and self-optimizing in many ways. The ability for the network to provide a level of self-RF planning is only one example of what a cognitive network can offer. Because a cognitive radio network can self-optimize and self-configure, little-to-no frequency coordination between cognitive radio nodes or other radio networks operating in the same frequencies is needed. This leads to an often overlooked benefit of having a self-planning, self-optimizing network: it reduces or eliminates the need for skilled radio technicians. These cognitive radio networks use software, powerful on-board computing power and real-time RF sensing to supplant expensive and overburdened radio technicians. The smart network goes beyond self-frequency planning to also encompass dynamic capacity shifting. That is to say that when a cell is lightly loaded, it can automatically abandon one or more channels in any given sector, thus making those channels available for adjacent cells to use if loading at that cell justifies the need for more spectrum. In addition to the ability to shift spectrum resources around to other cells, it also makes the network as a whole a

48


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

good neighbor to other systems that might be trying to use the same spectrum in a shared band (like TV White Spaces) by using the minimum amount of spectrum at any given time. Moreover, these capabilities will allow xMax® networks themselves to become mobile, adapting to new spectrum conditions and terrain “on-the-go”, which will make xMax® an excellent solution for expeditionary deployments by defense, public safety and emergency agencies.

Spectrum mobility refers to the ability to make use of spectrum dynamically, commonly called DSA. The system can decide to change bands or channels within the spectrum in which they are operating.

Spectrum sharing is the ability for a cognitive radio system to operate in shared spectrum (unlicensed spectrum, for example), detect stations that interfere with the transmissions, mitigate that interference if possible, or avoid it by changing operating frequencies or other system parameters. By enabling xMax® to tolerate high levels of interference before requiring the radios to switch channels, more “gray spectrum” (containing interference or jamming) can be used in place of white spectrum (clean and interference-free). This makes these white spectrum channels available for other radios that cannot mitigate the interference on their current channel. The overall capability increases the network’s total throughput and capacity greatly —  without consuming additional scarce spectrum resources.

Spatial processing is the use of multiple integrated receiver chains known as MIMO systems that can provide another layer of resistance to interferers. MIMO processing allows better use of the radio channel to improve link budget and data rates. By employing advanced signal processing techniques, we believe that our system can also be used to track and mitigate interference from multiple mobile transmitters using sophisticated signal processing algorithms. The ability to mitigate, rather than simply run away from interference will be critical going forward. We believe that there will be no more “white spaces” and that all spectrum will be made up of “gray spaces” (interference laden frequencies) caused by a system’s own self-interface or that which is caused by other nearby systems.

We believe that a true cognitive or intelligent radio network will make use of most, if not all, of these capabilities in order to be able dynamically to keep the system operating by mitigating or avoiding interference that may show up in the frequencies the cognitive network is currently using. If the interference becomes too severe, an intelligent system will be able to locate other spectrum and shift the radio links to new frequencies nearly instantaneously. Using cognitive radio techniques, the cognitive network can intelligently share spectrum and extract more bandwidth via “opportunistic use” of shared spectrum resources.

Today’s cognitive radio systems are taking advantage of new antenna technology (such as MIMO) and digital signal processors (DSPs) with advanced, innovative software algorithms. This evolution has also yielded a class of DSPs that are incredibly powerful, yet still energy-efficient. These and other technologies are enabling a new generation of smart (i.e., cognitive) radios. In general, the limiting factor in high capacity wireless systems is interference. As stated above, there are a number of ways to deal with interference to keep the communications link up and running. Unlike traditional systems (such as 3G and 4G), cognitive systems can recognize and then deal with interference locally and in real-time, thus greatly increasing the capacity of new and existing spectrum.

Products

xMax®:  the first implementation of xG’s innovative cognitive radio intellectual property is xMax®. Operating initially within the 902 – 928 MHz license-free band, xMax® is a mobile voice over internet protocol (“VoIP”) and broadband data system that utilizes an end-to-end Internet Protocol (“IP”) system architecture. The xMax® technology we are developing is spectrum agnostic. In any spectrum band that xMax® will operate in, we will break the band into channels and sub channels. We will then use spatial processing and adaptive modulation to mitigate interference in that band. If the band becomes unusable because of overwhelming interference, we will then use dynamic spectrum access to change to another channel or band. The xMax® product suite we are currently developing is band specific due to the current limitations in RF technology that can be produced for a given size, cost and complexity. Multiband, small, portable devices today require custom developed integrated circuits, which are on our technology roadmap, but not currently available. The mid-term objective is to transition implementation of xMax® to a licensing and semiconductor chip business model, which is anticipated to begin in 2016.

49


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The xMax® system design represents a turnkey network solution that will include rapid-deploy self-organizing access points (base stations), fixed and mobile personal Wi-Fi hotspots, mobile switching centers, as well as network management and deployment tools. A key feature of the xMax® system is the ability to leverage off-the-shelf commercial mobile devices (such as smartphones, laptops and tablets), resulting in reduced network infrastructure, maintenance and operational costs. The xMax® system will allow mobile operators to utilize free, unlicensed 902 – 928 MHz ISM band spectrum (available in most of the Americas) instead of having to purchase scarce licensed spectrum which can be prohibitively expensive. In addition, mobile network operators will be able to use xMax® cognitive radio technology to add additional capacity to licensed spectrum by identifying and utilizing unused bandwidth in those frequencies.

Our xMax® system is designed to utilize an advanced cognitive radio technology that incorporates OFDM and MIMO to increase interference tolerance, allow mobility, and improve resistance to fading. All xMax® products leverage an array of high-performance, low-cost digital signal processors (DSPs) that enable multidimensional signal processing that mitigates interference and dynamically optimizes available spectrum. xMax’s software defined radios (SDR) are designed to be inherently frequency-agile, which will allow network access points and user devices to automatically retune and operate on clearer channels within the band. This innovative signal processing will enable xMax® to deliver a licensed spectrum experience using unlicensed spectrum.

The product portfolio that we are creating by combining advanced computer processing power and novel wireless design means that a technology solution is becoming a viable alternative to past public and private spectrum acquisition policies. We employ a multifaceted cognitive radio approach that combines sophisticated interference mitigation capabilities with innovative dynamic spectrum access attributes. The former features MIMO smart antenna technologies. Employed in concert, these capabilities will help squeeze additional usable spectrum out of airwaves once considered unusable for advanced mobile communications.

xMod:

[GRAPHIC MISSING]

The xMax® xMod is a device that allows users of Wi-Fi-enabled smartphones, tablets, notebooks and other devices to access the Internet through the xMax® cognitive radio network. The xMod acts as a transparent protocol bridge that connects end user devices to the wide-area xMax® network using secure Wi-Fi links, USB or Ethernet cables. It supports not only fixed users but will also supports mobile users and has been designed to provide exceptional QoS (Quality of Service) and MoS (Mean Opinion Score) while supporting calls, texting (SMS) and broadband data streams over the xMax® network.

The xMod includes a Wi-Fi router chip that allows it to simultaneously support multiple external devices wirelessly. It will enable operators to deploy long-range xMax® networks that can integrate with the large installed base of Wi-Fi and Ethernet-capable devices. Subscribers will easily be able to install and set up an

50


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xMod to support any device having a Wi-Fi, USB or Ethernet connection. By incorporating xMax® radios and 2x4 MIMO technology, xMods can provide range and reliability that management believes is superior to Wi-Fi-based wide-area systems.

The xMod and xMax® system is designed to support nomadic and mobile connectivity (including high-speed handoffs) which will allow xMax® operators to offer on-the-go services that differ from those of fixed services, such as cable and DSL. It will be possible to deploy xMax® in fixed, mobile or nomadic configurations. When a planned later version of xMax® delivering higher data rates is deployed in a fixed manner rural telecommunications operators could recover the cost of the network via the Universal Service Fund (“USF”) subsidy mechanism. Recent regulatory reform has begun to transition USF support to broadband capable networks. Because xMax® can carry both voice and data, we believe that xMax® is well suited for rural carriers to handle such a transition. As with all the components in the xMax® family of products, the xMod is designed to offer increased range, flexibility, throughput and reliability, while reducing network deployment and management costs. Management believes this will make xMax® an attractive solution for WISPs, mobile telecommunications operators and other service providers.

xVM:

[GRAPHIC MISSING]

The xMax® xVMTM Vehicle Mounted Modem is an IP67-rated ruggedized subscriber device that is designed to be installed inside or outside vehicles. The xVM acts as a transparent protocol bridge, allowing users of WiFi-enabled smartphones, tablets, notebooks and other devices to seamlessly access the Internet through the xMax cognitive radio network.

The xVM is waterproof and made to withstand wide temperature ranges and challenging environmental conditions. It has been designed to meet the extreme demands characteristic of expeditionary environments, making it ideally suited for employment in the public safety, homeland security, and military market places.

While primarily developed for vehicle usage, the xVM may also be externally mounted in fixed locations like parks or other outdoor areas to provide WiFi access for use in monitoring, surveillance, machine-to-machine and other applications using the xMax backhaul link.

51


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xAP:

[GRAPHIC MISSING]

The xMax® xAP is an all-IP wireless access point that will deliver wide area coverage and reliability even when there is significant interference. The xAP brings together innovative technologies including Software Defined Radio (SDR), cognitive networking and a 2x4 MIMO in a compact and affordable broadband access point. These capabilities will enable the xAP to deliver wide area coverage and broadband throughput for fixed, nomadic and mobile applications.

xMax® radios and 2x4 MIMO technologies give the xAP range and reliability surpassing Wi-Fi-based systems. The xAP (as well as all xMax® components) will support nomadic and fully mobile connectivity, including high-speed handoff that will allow xMax® operators to offer on-the-go services that differ from those of fixed services, such as cable and DSL. As part of the xMax® family of products, the xAP is designed to offer increased coverage, throughput and robustness while reducing network deployment and management costs, making it, we believe, an attractive solution for WISPs, mobile telecommunications operators and other service providers. When implemented, Self-Organizing Networking (SON) technology will simplify and speed deployment for commercial, private and tactical networks.

The xAP is a small, single channel device that will provide a data rate of up to 3 Mbps per channel and supports a range of 1 to 5 miles (non-line-of-sight) and up to 8 miles (line-of-sight), depending on conditions. The xMax® system is designed so that it will be possible to collocate multiple xAP’s in order to increase system capacity. xAP’s are GPS time-synchronized to avoid self-interference, which increases overall system capacity and load leveling. These features, along with deterministic Media Access Control (MAC) for high-quality voice calls, give the xMax® system improved scalability in real-world conditions.

Having numerous accessible channels will allow neighboring network nodes (made up of one or more xAP’s) to utilize non-interfering channels automatically when employing the network self-planning features that are in our technology roadmap. This will allow the network to grow and scale more easily without the operator having to redesign the network RF plan each time a device moves, or when xAP’s or users are added or removed from the network.

52


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xMSC:

[GRAPHIC MISSING]

The xMax® Mobile Switching Center (xMSC) is the backbone network element in the xMax® regional network. The xMSC bridges the delivery of the voice and data services, and manages all elements in the regional network (access points, xMods and xVM’s).

The xMSC acts as an aggregation point for the connected xAP’s. It performs routing and security functions. The xMSC is typically connected to the Global Information Grid (GIG) and one or more VoIP soft switches.

53


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xMonitor/xDrive:

[GRAPHIC MISSING]

These software tools provide integrated and comprehensive network and element management for the xMax® network, as well as mobile network throughput and coverage optimization.

xMonitor is a component of the xMSC that monitors the status and health of all xAP’s, xMSC elements, and VoIP core elements. It provides end-to-end IP network management and monitoring services. xMonitor is a web-based application that will be installed at an operator’s Network Operation Center, enabling remote management of network status. The program runs as a live application that continuously collects data from the network, updating the aggregated information without user intervention. It can be programmed to display specific views around the clock — providing an at-a-glance heads-up display from which to survey the network.

xDrive is a drive mapping utility designed to gather, display and log performance statistics from the xMod and xVM. It will allow field technicians to map the coverage of a deployment of xAP’s, as well as providing xMod/xVM to xAP to link statistics.

Competition

The wireless technology sector is intensely competitive and is rapidly evolving. Several vendors have researched and experimented with cognitive radios. This research predominately falls under the traditional industry defined use of a cognitive radio where cognitive capabilities are restricted to dynamic spectrum access (“DSA”) within the radio device. However, we believe that only a few vendors are undertaking development across all the key elements of cognitive technology: spectrum sensing, spectrum management, spectrum mobility, spectrum sharing, and spatial processing.

54


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

As an example, both Spectrum Bridge and Microsoft have developed a database approach to frequency reuse. This method was developed specifically to enable unlicensed broadband systems to coexist with existing TV transmitters in the TV White Spaces band.

We not only face competition from other companies developing cognitive radio solutions but we are also competing for sales to end-user customers with companies offering solutions utilizing other technologies for access to licensed and unlicensed spectrum, such as LTE and Wi-Fi.

In the cognitive radio market, our competitors include, Neul Ltd., Shared Spectrum Corporation and Adaptrum.

End-customers in the rural broadband market are being offered a choice of solutions based on alternative technologies, such as LTE and Wi-Fi. Global communications networking equipment vendors such as Ericsson, Huawei, Alcatel-Lucent and others are actively selling and deploying LTE and, to a lesser extent, WiMax equipment with rural telecommunications operators that own, or can lease, appropriate licensed spectrum frequencies. We also face competition for equipment sales with Ruckus Wireless, Ubiquiti Networks and Cambium Networks, which have also targeted markets for communications systems around the world similar to our target markets. Although these companies are vastly larger than we are, with significantly greater resources, we believe that we or our channel partners will need to convince end users to consider our offerings as a viable alternative to these larger companies if we are to succeed.

It is not uncommon for a single rural operator to deploy a mix of technologies (such as LTE and Wi-Fi) to address differing applications, spectrum holdings and economics across their market areas. As new technologies are introduced and spectrum availability and costs increase, we anticipate that rural telecommunications operators will continue to deploy a growing range of innovative solutions that deliver voice and data communications to their customers.

The main vendor in the public safety market is Motorola Solutions, which is a global player that holds a highly dominant market share in the U.S. of over 80% in public safety and government wireless networks.

In the defense market, there are several large and significant companies that provide wireless communications systems to U.S. and international military agencies, including Harris Corporation, ITT Industries, Raytheon, Boeing, Thales Communications and Lockheed Martin. It is common for one competitor to be a subcontractor to another competitor who is the prime contractor and vice versa as programs of record ramp up and ramp down over time.

A number of our current or potential competitors have long operating histories, significant brand recognition, large customer bases and significantly greater financial, technical, sales, marketing and other resources than we do. As an emerging technology company, our brand is not as well known as incumbents in those markets. Potential customers may prefer to purchase from their existing suppliers rather than a new supplier, regardless of product performance or features.

Competitive Positioning

Regulatory risk — we believe that our choice initially to develop our cognitive radio technology utilizing the unlicensed 902 – 928 band exposes us to less regulatory risk than companies building products upon newly available TV White Space frequencies. Whereas the 902 – 928 MHz band has withstood multiple attempts to redefine the rules regarding its use, newer frequency bands such as TV White Spaces have yet to demonstrate their permanence. Specific initiatives to license off TV White Space frequencies for cellular carrier use are being promoted by licensed spectrum stakeholders. While our core technology can be adapted for operation upon such newly available frequencies once their staying power has been demonstrated, we believe that we are not subject to the same make-or-break dependency upon the availability of TV White Spaces as are most other cognitive radio product companies.

Mobility — we are specifically developing our product line to support mobility. We believe that mobility is an important differentiator with regard to our offering in the marketplace. Designed to do its own RF planning automatically by utilizing an extended range of non-interfering channels without manual intervention, xMax® will offer the ability to make the entire network infrastructure mobile, with xAP base stations able to move in relation to each other as well as to xMods, xVM’s and users. We believe this feature will be unique to xMax® and will address a major capability gap for defense, homeland security, and public safety agencies which all

55


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

require “on the move” communications networks. These agencies currently have no equipment or capacity for this identified and urgently needed capability.

Support for both real-time VoIP and data sessions utilizing a single set of infrastructure — Most IP systems do not carry large numbers of simultaneous voice conversations. We have focused on designing a core technology that is capable of carrying both mass-scale voice and data sessions on the same network.

Interference mitigation — Whereas most efforts to date focus on interference avoidance, we have extended our core competency into the realm of interference mitigation. In a world where wireless demand is certain to result in more, not less, congested airwaves, we believe that our intellectual property that can help to ameliorate interference is a unique competitive advantage in the marketplace.

We believe we compete favorably on these factors. However, our industry is evolving rapidly and is becoming increasingly competitive. Other developers could develop alternative wireless cognitive networks and other technologies that may adversely affect our ability to attract and retain customers. These competitors may include companies of which we may not be currently aware.

Sales and Marketing

Our strategy is to sell intellectual property and the equipment in which our intellectual property is initially implemented, globally direct and through an indirect channel network that we will leverage in order to upscale our selling efforts without the significant cost of a large direct sales force. Our channel partners will utilize their own internal and external sales representatives to provide lead generation among their established customer base and beyond, pre-sales support, product fulfillment and, in certain circumstances, post-sales customer service and support. In certain cases, service providers may also act as a channel partner for sales of our solutions to their existing customers or new enterprise accounts.

Our sales team currently is comprised of business development, relationship and account executives and a channel manager. This sales team is focused on supporting our current customers, as well as nurturing relationships with prospective customers in key domestic and international markets. Our relationship managers support the development of sales presentation materials and training of our channel partner sales personnel to assist them in marketing our services, either directly or indirectly to their customers. We also directly train and support selected key customers and technology providers in order to grow an active client base and solidify relationships. We are currently using the SalesLogix Customer Relationship Management (CRM) tool to manage our sales activity and manage these relationships.

We also have a relationship with one of the leading grant writing and funding specialist firms in the United States, Gilmore Tragus Strategies, LLC (“GTS”). GTS has written applications for, and their customers have been awarded, over $1 billion in local, state and federal funding initiatives over the past ten years. Having a partner like GTS gives our sales team and channel partners a competitive advantage because these grants can provide a majority of the funding needed to purchase our products and services.

As of March 31, 2014, our business development, sales and marketing team consisted of nine full-time employees or contractors, supported by outside marketing professionals.

Customers

Although still at an early stage, we have begun to implement our sales and marketing strategy, both through direct sales to end-customers and indirect sales to channel network partners and we have entered into a number of equipment purchase, reseller and teaming agreements as a result.

In addition to the sales backlog of $7.4 million that was outstanding at December 31, 2012, the Company has added $12.1 million of additional sales orders from January 1, 2013 through December 31, 2013. At December 31, 2013 the total backlog of reseller agreements was $15.9 million and the total backlog of purchase orders was $18.7 million for a total of $34.6 million.

These agreements contain certain conditions to payment to us, including (depending on the agreement) FCC equipment authorization, delivery of equipment and services, acceptable performance of equipment, delivery of purchase orders and favorable customer financing. In the event that the systems that we deliver to these potential customers do not satisfy certain technical expectations or requirements of those customers, we will not receive any revenue from these purchase orders.

56


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

We have begun to fulfill orders now that our equipment has been certificated by the FCC. Revenues are recognized over the respective lives of the agreements according to the delivery and transfer of ownership and risk of xMax® equipment and the provision of services as well as specification of features required by our customers.

Manufacturing and Suppliers

We retain contract manufacturers to manufacture, test, assure the quality of, and ship our products. We primarily utilize contract manufacturers located in the United States to ensure proximity between the manufacturer and our design and development engineers and with the initial customers we anticipate winning.

Our internal manufacturing organization consists of a small number of supply chain managers, employees and contractors who supervise the manufacture of our products at contract manufacturer sites. We rely on our contract manufacturers, test engineers and our internal quality assurance resources to implement quality assurance programs designed to assure high product quality and reliability.

In the future, we will focus on our core strengths, which are innovation and technology design and the development, creation and exploitation of our intellectual property. Accordingly, we ultimately plan to become a designer, developer and fabless supplier of xMax® integrated circuits and system software solutions for xMax® products where we would supply integrated circuits produced by third party manufacturing partners under license, software, reference designs, features, tools and technical support. We expect this transition to begin in 2016.

We rely on third party components and technology to build our products, and we procure components, subassemblies and products necessary for the manufacture of our products based upon our design, development and production needs. Once we have retained a contract manufacturer, they will be responsible for obtaining these components, subassemblies and products. While components and supplies are generally available from a variety of sources, we currently depend on a single or limited number of suppliers for several components for our products. We are using a single source digital signal processor that may be difficult to replace with an equivalent performance device. In the longer term, we are planning to adapt the xMax® system to run on multiple low cost platforms. We rely on purchase orders rather than long-term contracts with our suppliers. We do not currently stockpile enough components to mitigate any potential supply disruption if we are required to re-engineer our products to use alternative components.

Intellectual Property

Our business is significantly based on the creation, acquisition, use and protection of intellectual property. Some of this intellectual property is in the form of software code, patented technology and trade secrets that we use to develop our technologies, solutions and products. We have developed a broad portfolio of intellectual property that covers wired and wireless communications systems. As of March 31, 2014, in the United States, we have 49 patents granted and 11 patent applications pending. Internationally, we have 64 patents granted, 66 patent applications pending, and 8 Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) applications.

Areas of our development activities for xMax® and beyond that have culminated in filings and/or awarded patents include:

Spatial Processing (MIMO);
Self-Organizing Networks;
RF Modulation;
Compression (protocols, payload, signaling, etc.);
Modulators/Demodulators;
Antennas/Shielding;
Wired and Wireless Networks;
Media Access Control Protocols;

57


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Interference Mitigation;
Cognition enabling over the air protocols (MAC layer);
Wireless data compression;
Dynamic Spectrum Access (DSA); and
Quality of Service.

We protect our intellectual property rights by relying on federal, state and common law rights, as well as contractual restrictions. We control access to our proprietary technology by entering into confidentiality and invention assignment agreements with our employees and contractors, and confidentiality agreements with third parties. We also actively engage in monitoring activities with respect to infringing uses of our intellectual property by third parties.

In addition to these contractual arrangements, we also rely on a combination of trade secret, copyright, trademark, trade dress, domain name and patents to protect our products and other intellectual property. We typically own the copyright to our software code, as well as the brand or title name trademark under which our products are marketed. We pursue the registration of our domain names, trademarks, and service marks in the United States and in locations outside the United States. Our registered trademarks in the United States include “xG”, and “xMax®”, the names of our suite of products, among others.

Circumstances outside our control could pose a threat to our intellectual property rights. For example, effective intellectual property protection may not be available in the United States or other countries in which our products are sold or distributed. Also, the efforts we have taken to protect our proprietary rights may not be sufficient or effective. Any significant impairment of our intellectual property rights could harm our business or our ability to compete. In addition, protecting our intellectual property rights is costly and time-consuming. Any unauthorized disclosure or use of our intellectual property could make it more expensive to do business, thereby harming our operating results.

Companies in the mobile wireless communications technology and other industries may own large numbers of patents, copyrights and trademarks and may frequently request license agreements, threaten litigation or file suit against us based on allegations of infringement or other violations of intellectual property rights. We may face allegations by third parties, including our competitors and non-practicing entities, that we have infringed their trademarks, copyrights, patents and other intellectual property rights. As our business grows, we will likely face more claims of infringement.

Government Regulations

Regulators’ Role in Spectrum

In the past, all radios were designed with the assumption that they were operating in a spectrum band that was free of interference. There was no requirement to design radios with the ability to dynamically change channels or change spectrum bands in response to interference. These radios required pristine, dedicated licensed spectrum to operate. This led to the FCC and other regulators worldwide licensing spectrum to a particular network operator, for example, cellular paging or wireless service provider so that interference would be carefully controlled. Because of this past legacy, significant blocks of spectrum were underutilized. Even in spectrum bands that might be considered to be highly utilized, valuable spectrum can sit idle in sparsely populated areas or at certain hours of the day when network use dramatically drops.

There are also applications such as paging that have fallen out of favor and contribute to this underutilization. Despite the dramatic drop in the use of pagers, a large amount of spectrum is still dedicated to this application. This regulatory policy has led to inefficient use of spectrum and consequently the declaration of a spectrum crisis. While regulators are continuing to allocate spectrum based upon this assumption that radios do not have the ability to share spectrum, they are now starting to embrace the concept of shared spectrum and the opportunistic use of spectrum enabled by cognitive radio networks.

58


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Regulators are starting to ease the rules relating to the allocation and access of spectrum. A good example of this is the shared use of TV broadcast spectrum via the creation of TV White Spaces for wireless broadband. The FCC and other spectrum regulatory agencies like the UK’s Ofcom have begun the process to allow cognitive radios to use freed-up spectrum resulting from the transition from analog to digital TV broadcasts. For example, TV white space continues to gain momentum in the US and Europe with multiple deployments and trials being supported by some of the world’s largest technology companies. Furthermore, a new group has been formed called AIR.U that is being funded by Microsoft, Google and others to utilize TV White Spaces to bring high-speed Internet services to rural campuses, schools and other institutions in the US. Similar initiatives are being undertaken in the UK with extensive trials being done in both urban and rural settings using TV White Spaces. In addition to two of the largest technology companies mentioned above, Nokia is also taking a leading role in the UK’s TV White Space trials. While there have been rumors circulating that the FCC was somehow taking back TV White Spaces, there appears to be no actual indication of this taking place. In fact, the FCC appears to be approving more TV White Space database administrators as well as certifying additional radio platforms for operation in TV White Spaces. It is possible, nonetheless, that over time, TV White Spaces could be reclaimed by Congress or the FCC and re-auctioned for licensed use. However, that is a risk any unlicensed spectrum faces and has never actually occurred in the US. Other countries globally are also seriously considering creating their own TV white space allocations. These countries include Canada, Brazil and the EU.

Operators and consumers are able to use available unlicensed spectrum bands for the delivery of new applications and inexpensive broadband capacity. An example of this is the data offload efforts of some carriers that use 802.11 Wi-Fi (in the 2.4 and 5.8 GHz unlicensed bands) in densely populated areas where their 3G network is congested. This allows carriers to continue supporting mobile voice and data services over their licensed spectrum, while data that can be consumed at a fixed location (airport, coffee shop, office, etc.) is forced over an unlicensed Wi-Fi link. However, the popularity of Wi-Fi and other devices that use these frequencies has resulted in crowded and noisy spectrum that not only has to support the carriers’ smartphone data, but all other applications from other devices in that band as well. The interference in these bands affects the capacity and efficiency of this spectrum for conventional radios. However, where conventional radios see “walls of interference”, cognitive radios can uncover “windows of opportunity” and recover up to 85% of the total unused bandwidth in these frequencies.

The FCC’s Part 15 rules that govern use of the 902 – 928 MHz ISM band and other unlicensed spectrum bands are well established and are considered responsible for creating an environment where technology and innovation has flourished. They are recognized as having helped create an industry that has generated tens of thousands of high technology jobs, added billions of dollars to the United States economy, and brought the benefits of a wide variety of convenient, economical communications devices to business, industry, education, health care providers and consumers alike. While there have been some attempts to challenge them, they have always been reaffirmed and we have every reason to believe they will remain so.

Even during the recent debates over spectrum policy, there have been no suggestions put forth by the FCC, the Congress or industry to repurpose the ISM unlicensed band to a licensed one that could be auctioned off. The reallocation of a band that is in active use by so many devices would be prohibitively disruptive. Given the long history and widespread use of the ISM band for such a wide array of communications, we feel very confident that it will remain open to use by technologies such as xMax® for the foreseeable future.

While devices operating upon unlicensed bands do not require FCC licensing, they are not unregulated and must meet the Federal Code of Regulation (CFR) FCC Part 15, which is a common testing standard for most electronic equipment. FCC Part 15 covers the regulations under which an intentional, unintentional, or incidental radiator that can be operated without an individual license. FCC Part 15 covers as well the technical specifications, administrative requirements and other conditions relating to the marketing of FCC Part 15 devices.

In order to reduce regulatory risk and gain familiarity with the requirements we elected to obtain FCC equipment authorization on some of our pre-commercial prototype xMax® devices. FCC authorized testing laboratories were used to make measurements to ensure that the prototype equipment complied with the appropriate technical standards. Although not required unless specifically requested, we submitted a sample unit and representative data to the Commissions demonstrating compliance. Multiple briefings were also

59


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

scheduled with the FCC Chief of the Office of Engineering Technology (OET) and staff, which is responsible for Equipment Certifications in an effort to inform them of our design approaches and objectives.

Limitation of existing solutions.  Existing wireless networking technologies such as standard 802.11 based Wi-Fi, WiMAX and LTE have been designed to satisfy the increasing demand for broadband access and support mobility. According to a Gartner forecast in May 2011, aggregate end-user spending on wireless networking equipment for Enterprise WLAN, wireless broadband access, and LTE solutions, are expected to grow from $5.2 billion in 2010 to $22.5 billion in 2015, representing a CAGR of 34%. However, these existing alternative networking solutions often fail to meet the price-performance requirements of wireless networking in emerging markets, which in turn has led to low penetration and large populations of unaddressed users in these areas. As a result, there is a strong need for cost-effective solutions to deliver wireless networking solutions to consumers and enterprises in underserved and underpenetrated markets. These solutions must be robust and provide service equivalent to that of alternative wired and wireless solutions while simultaneously meeting the economic objectives of network operators and service providers in these markets.

Increasing use of the unlicensed spectrum.  Private industry in underserved and underpenetrated markets worldwide has responded to the lack of wired infrastructure by deploying wireless networks utilizing unlicensed RF spectrum. These network operators and service providers often cannot afford the capital outlay to acquire licenses for the licensed RF spectrum and have consequently designed their wireless networks for the unlicensed RF spectrum. In the absence of affordable broadband access in the licensed spectrum, the number of users of the unlicensed RF spectrum has increased for communications equipment, as well as consumer devices such as cordless phones, baby monitors and microwave ovens. As a result of high demand for the unlicensed RF spectrum, use of this spectrum to provide high quality wireless networking has become more challenging and congestion is limiting the growth of wireless networks.

Government incentives for broadband access.  Governments around the world are increasingly taking both regulatory and financial steps to expand access to broadband networks and increase availability of advanced broadband services to consumers and businesses. For example, in many countries, including the United States, the responsible regulatory agencies have released the spectrum previously used for broadcast TV, known as the TV White Space, to relieve some of the congestion. The United States and other countries have adopted stimulus plans to increase the delivery of robust broadband access in unserved and underserved areas. The World Bank has reported that 12 countries and the EU have committed an aggregate of $122.4 billion in broadband stimulus funds to date.

Employees

As of March 31, 2014, we employed 85 full-time equivalent employees, contractors or consultants, which included 64 in development, 4 officers, 6 in general and administrative, 1 in business development, 2 in operations and 8 in sales and marketing. As of that date, we had 84 full-time equivalent employees, contractors or consultants, based in the United States. We also engage a number of temporary employees and consultants. None of our employees are represented by a labor union or is a party to a collective bargaining agreement. We believe that we have good relations with our employees.

Properties

Our corporate headquarters and marketing and business development office are located in Sarasota, Florida, in an office consisting of a total of 3,403 square feet. This office is made available to us under the MBC management contract. For our research and development, engineering, sales and support personnel we also have an office in Sunrise, Fort Lauderdale, Florida consisting of 12,832 square feet pursuant to a lease that expires on May 11, 2016. We believe our current facilities are sufficient for our current needs and will be adequate, or that suitable additional or substitute space will be available on commercially reasonable terms, for the foreseeable future.

Legal Proceedings

We are currently not involved in any litigation that we believe could have a materially adverse effect on our financial condition or results of operations. There is no action, suit, proceeding, inquiry or investigation before or by any court, public board, government agency, self-regulatory organization or body pending or, to the

60


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

knowledge of the executive officers of our company or any of our subsidiaries, threatened against or affecting our company, our common stock, any of our subsidiaries or of our company’s or our company’s subsidiaries’ officers or directors in their capacities as such, in which an adverse decision could have a material adverse effect. From time to time, we may become involved legal proceedings, lawsuits, claims and regulations in the ordinary course of our business.

61


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

MANAGEMENT

Executive Officers and Directors

The following table sets forth the names, ages and positions of all of the directors and executive officers of the Company and the positions they hold as of the date hereof.

   
Name   Age   Position
George F. Schmitt   70   Executive Chairman of the Board and Director
John C. Coleman   60   Chief Executive Officer, Chief Operating Officer and Director
Roger G. Branton   46   Chief Financial Officer
James Woodyatt   46   President
Belinda Marino   54   Secretary
Gary Cuccio   67   Director
Kenneth Hoffman   57   Director
Richard L. Mooers   50   Director
Raymond M. Sidney   44   Director
Larry C. Townes   64   Director

Background of Directors and Executive Officers

George F. Schmitt, Executive Chairman of the Board and Director

Mr. Schmitt has over 40 years of broad telecom experience in wireless and wireline companies and has built wireless networks in a dozen countries. He is a major investor in xG Technology through his personal holdings and through his holdings in MBTH and became Executive Chairman of the Board on July 19, 2013 while previously serving as a Director since March 2011. He also previously served as the Chief Executive Officer of MBTH, from December 2010 through December 2013. Mr. Schmitt currently sits on the board of directors of SecureAlert, Culient, and the California Thoroughbred Breeders Association. Mr. Schmitt previously served as a director of TeleAtlas, Objective Systems Integrators, Omnipoint and LHS Group. Mr. Schmitt is a principal of Sierra Sunset II, LLC and served as a former Trustee of St. Mary’s College. In addition, Mr. Schmitt has served as a director of many privately held companies including Voice Objects, Knowledge Adventure, Jungo and Cybergate, among others. Mr. Schmitt has also served as Financial Vice President of Pacific Telesis and chaired the Audit Committees of Objective Systems Integrations and TeleATLAS. Mr. Schmitt received an M.S. in Management from Stanford University, where he was a Sloan Fellow, and a B.A. in Political Science from Saint Mary’s College.

Mr. Schmitt was selected to serve on our board based on his extensive experience with technology and networking companies and broad experience in the telecommunications industry and his status as a significant investor in our company.

John C. Coleman, Chief Executive Officer and Director

Mr. Coleman brings to us 35 years of combined experience in expeditionary operations from both government service and the private sector. Since June 2010, he has served as the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Operating Officer of the Company. From January 2009 to June 2012, he was the Chief Executive Officer of Joint Command and Control Consulting (JC3), a consulting services firm he founded that is focused on the development, integration, and delivery of mature and emerging technologies in support of expeditionary operations, particularly as related to command, control, and communications. In conjunction with its strategic partners, JC3 provides C4ISR-related systems, service, training, and support to expeditionary responders, both civil and military. He also served as a Vice-President of Hunter Defense Technology, a position he held from July 2006 to December 2008. In the thirty years preceding private sector employment, Mr. Coleman served the United States as a U.S. Marine Officer. Defining the character of his service upon retirement, Mr. Coleman was awarded the nation’s Distinguished Service Medal, an honor very rarely and only under exceptional circumstance bestowed to Marines below the rank of General Officer. He retired from the U.S. Marine Corp as a Colonel. He possesses top secret clearance which gives him access to several of our major markets. Currently, Mr. Coleman serves as a member of the board of xG.

62


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Mr. Coleman was selected to serve on our board based on his extensive experience in the military and his top secret clearance, which are critical elements of our Company’s ability to conduct business with the segments of the government and Homeland Security that we have targeted.

Roger G. Branton, Chief Financial Officer

For the past 11 years he has served in a variety of positions with our company since its founding in August, 2002. Mr. Branton currently serves as our Chief Financial Officer since inception. He also serves in similar capacities at MBTH, a company he co-founded with Richard Mooers and George Schmitt in 2010. He graduated from West Chester University in Pennsylvania with a Bachelor of Science degree in accounting. He trained as a certified public accountant in 1989.

James Woodyatt, President

Mr. Woodyatt has served as our President since April 20, 2012. He also served as our Deputy Chief Executive Officer from June 2007 to April 20, 2012, at which time James assumed the President title, and as a Director from January 2007 through July 2013. From February 2006 until October 2011, James served as President of Veegoo Holding SA, a company he co-founded in 2006 and as a Managing Director of Veegoo Capital Services SA, a group which is active in business advisory and private equity.

Belinda Marino, Secretary

Mrs. Marino has served secretary since August 2013. Mrs. Marino is also an employee of the Company serving as the Director of Human Resources since 2006. In addition to the above, Mrs. Marino has ongoing responsibilities for functions that include corporate banking activities and corporate governance. Mrs. Marino earned a PHR (Professional in Human Resources) Certificate from the HR Certification Institute in 2009.

Gary Cuccio, Director

Gary Cuccio has over 35 years of broad operating experience in wireless, software, engineering, operations, sales and marketing. Mr. Cuccio currently serves as Chairman of Openet Telecom Ltd. Based in Dublin, Ireland, Openet Telecom is a venture-backed software company providing IP mediation to leading Telco’s on a global basis. Mr. Cuccio also serves on the board of mBlox as the chairman of its audit committee. mBlox is a venture-backed startup providing a service bureau for SMS messages in the wireless space. Headquartered in London and Sunnyvale, CA, mBlox operates in Europe, the U.S. and Asia. Previously, Mr. Cuccio was CEO of ATG, a CLEC based in California, Oregon, and Washington. Prior to ATG, Mr. Cuccio was CEO of LHS group (Nasdaq: LHSG), a Telco billing software supplier. LHS was acquired by Sema, a French software company, in Q3, 2000 for $6.8BB. Mr. Cuccio was also COO of Omnipoint, a PCS mobile wireless carrier. Mr. Cuccio’s experience also includes several positions held at Airtouch, most notably Vice President of Operations for Europe, Vice President, Asia and President of Airtouch Paging. The company was merged with Vodafone in 1999. He has also served as chairman of the board and audit committee chairman of privately held companies and has helped sell and merge several public and privately held companies. Mr. Cuccio started his career with 27+ years at Pacific Tel in Operations, Engineering, Customer Service and Sales & Marketing, ending his tenure there as VP/General Manager.

Mr. Cuccio received his AMP from Harvard University, his MBA from St. Mary’s College and his BA in Political Science from California State University Los Angeles.

Mr. Cuccio was selected to serve on our board based on his 45 years of experience with technology and communications companies as well as his financial and audit committee background. Mr. Cuccio qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert” within the meaning of the SEC regulations.

Kenneth Hoffman, Director

Mr. Hoffman joined the Company in August 2010 as an advisor. Ken Hoffman is Vice President of Regulatory Affairs for Florida Power & Light Company, the rate-regulated subsidiary of NextEra Energy, Inc. (NYSE: NEE), one of the nation’s leading electricity-related services companies. He is responsible for providing assistance in the management and oversight of FPL’s regulatory activities before state regulators and the State Legislature on energy matters. Mr. Hoffman joined FPL in 2008 after a successful career in private law practice specializing in the representation of public utilities and telecommunications companies before the

63


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Florida Public Service Commission, the Florida Legislature and the Florida courts. He has over 25 years’ experience representing various types of telecommunications carriers including wireless before regulatory and legislative bodies. His expertise in regulatory proceedings in Florida will be helpful as we grow and face potential regulatory actions. Prior to joining FPL, he was a shareholder at Rutledge Ecenia Purnell & Hoffman, PA, in Tallahassee, Florida for 14 years.

Mr. Hoffman was selected to serve on our board based on his extensive experience in the utility industry, a key industry segment to utilize our products and services.

Richard L. Mooers, Director

Richard Mooers has been involved in telecommunications activities for over 20 years and has significant expertise in accounting, risk management, and controls. For the past 11 years he has served in a variety of positions with our company since its founding in August, 2002. Mr. Mooers served as our Executive Chairman of the Board from inception until July 19, 2013 and will continue to serve as a Director, a position he has held from inception. He also serves as Chairman, CEO and Director of MBTH a company he co-founded with Roger Branton and George Schmitt in 2010. Richard graduated summa cum laude from the University of Maine, with a Bachelor of Science degree in business administration in 1985. He remains one of the major investors in the Company.

Mr. Mooers was selected to serve on our board based on his extensive experience with technology and telecommunications companies, including as a founder, executive and investor.

Raymond M. Sidney, Director

Dr. Sidney has established several real estate investment ventures and been involved with a number of companies, including Covia Labs, Hemedex, Edison2 and Commuter Cars as an investor, board member or advisor. He also serves on the Vision Circle of the X PRIZE Foundation. Prior to this, Dr. Sidney was the second software engineer hired at Google, Inc. Previously, Dr. Sidney had worked as a security expert and software engineer at RSA Labs and D.E. Shaw & Co., among other companies. He provided the implementation expertise for RC6, RSA’s candidate cipher for NIST’s quest for AES, a successor to the Data Encryption Standard. Dr. Sidney attended Caltech and Harvard, and he received a bachelor’s degree in mathematics from Harvard in 1991. He then entered the graduate program in mathematics at MIT, where he specialized in cryptography and received a PhD in 1995. His higher mathematics knowledge will be helpful to our development team. Dr. Sidney’s business experience includes running and investing in startups through his venture capital company, Big George Ventures. In addition, he is active in many educational and environmental undertakings in the Lake Tahoe area.

Mr. Sidney was selected to serve on our board based on his extensive experience with technology companies and broad experience in the venture capital industry.

Larry C. Townes, Director

Mr. Townes currently serves as the Chief Executive Officer of Townes Tele-Communications, Inc., a position he has held since 1981. At Townes Tele-Communications, a holding company with widely diversified business interests, Mr. Townes directs the operations as Chairman of the board. These interests include eight incumbent rural telephone companies operating in seven states, wireless operations which include cellular radio service, petroleum exploration and production, and agricultural operations and related riparian rights in northern Texas. He is the owner of a bank in Arkansas and Texas. Mr. Townes also serves on the boards of a number of other privately held companies. He has relevant experience in business undertakings around the world.

Mr. Townes was selected to serve on our board based on his extensive experience with technology and networking companies and broad experience in the telecommunications industry.

Board Composition and Committees and Director Independence

Director Independence

Our board of directors currently consists of seven members: Richard L. Mooers, John C. Coleman, Gary Cuccio, Kenneth Hoffman, George F. Schmitt, Raymond M. Sidney and Larry C. Townes. All of our directors will serve until our next annual meeting and until their successors are duly elected and qualified.

64


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

As we are listed on NASDAQ, our determination of independence of directors is made using the definition of “independent director” contained in Rule 5605(a)(2) of the Marketplace Rules of the NASDAQ Stock Market. Our board affirmatively determined that Gary Cuccio, Kenneth Hoffman, Larry C. Townes and Ray Sidney, are “independent” directors, as that term is defined in the Nasdaq Stock Market Rules.

Board Committees

Our board of directors has an audit committee, a compensation committee and a governance and nominations committee. Each committee has a charter, which is available on our website at www.xgtechnology.com. Information contained on our website is not incorporated herein by reference. Each of the board committees has the composition and responsibilities described below.

Audit Committee

We have an Audit Committee established in accordance with Section 3(a)(58)(A) of the Exchange Act. The members of our Audit Committee are Gary Cuccio, Ken Hoffman and Larry Townes. Each of these Committee members is “independent” within the meaning of Rule 10A-3 under the Exchange Act and the NASDAQ Stock Market Rules. Our board has determined that Gary Cuccio shall serve as the “audit committee financial expert”, as such term is defined in Item 407(d)(5) of Regulation S-K. Gary Cuccio currently serves as Chairman of the Audit Committee of mBlox, Inc. and Openet Telecom Ltd. In the past he also served on the Audit Committee of Objective Systems Integration, Inc. and Affinity Internet, Inc. Gary Cuccio will serve as Chairman of our Audit Committee.

The Audit Committee oversees our accounting and financial reporting processes and oversees the audit of our financial statements and the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting. The specific functions of this Committee include:

selecting and recommending to our board of directors the appointment of an independent registered public accounting firm and overseeing the engagement of such firm;
approving the fees to be paid to the independent registered public accounting firm;
helping to ensure the independence of our independent registered public accounting firm;
overseeing the integrity of our financial statements;
preparing an audit committee report as required by the SEC to be included in our annual proxy statement;
reviewing major changes to our auditing and accounting principles and practices as suggested by our company’s independent registered public accounting firm, internal auditors (if any) or management;
reviewing and approving all related party transactions; and
overseeing our compliance with legal and regulatory requirements.

Compensation Committee

The members of our Compensation Committee are Gary Cuccio, Ken Hoffman, Ray Sidney and Larry Townes. Each such member is “independent” within the meaning of the NASDAQ Stock Market Rules. In addition, each member of our Compensation Committee qualifies as a “non-employee director” under Rule 16b-3 of the Exchange Act. Our Compensation Committee assists the board of directors in the discharge of its responsibilities relating to the compensation of the board of directors and our executive officers. Larry Townes serves as Chairman of our Compensation Committee.

The Committee’s compensation-related responsibilities include:

assisting our board of directors in developing and evaluating potential candidates for executive positions and overseeing the development of executive succession plans;
reviewing and approving on an annual basis the corporate goals and objectives with respect to compensation for our chief executive officer;

65


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

reviewing, approving and recommending to our board of directors on an annual basis the evaluation process and compensation structure for our other executive officers;
providing oversight of management’s decisions concerning the performance and compensation of other company officers, employees, consultants and advisors;
reviewing our incentive compensation and other stock-based plans and recommending changes in such plans to our board of directors as needed, and exercising all the authority of our board of directors with respect to the administration of such plans;
reviewing and recommending to our board of directors the compensation of independent directors, including incentive and equity-based compensation; and
selecting, retaining and terminating such compensation consultants, outside counsel and other advisors as it deems necessary or appropriate.

Governance and Nominations Committee

The members of our Governance and Nominations Committee are Gary Cuccio, Ken Hoffman, Ray Sidney and Larry Townes. Each such member is “independent” within the meaning of the NASDAQ Stock Market Rules. The purpose of the Governance and Nominations Committee is to recommend to the board nominees for election as directors and persons to be elected to fill any vacancies on the board, develop and recommend a set of corporate governance principles and oversee the performance of the board. Ken Hoffman will serve as chairman of our Governance and Nominations Committee.

The Committee’s responsibilities include:

Selecting director nominees.  The governance and nominations committee recommends to the board of directors nominees for election as directors at any meeting of stockholders and nominees to fill vacancies on the board. The governance and nominations committee would consider candidates proposed by stockholders and will apply the same criteria and follow substantially the same process in considering such candidates as it does when considering other candidates. The governance and nominations committee may adopt, in its discretion, separate procedures regarding director candidates proposed by our stockholders. Director recommendations by stockholders must be in writing, include a resume of the candidate’s business and personal background and include a signed consent that the candidate would be willing to be considered as a nominee to the board and, if elected, would serve. Such recommendation must be sent to the Company’s Secretary at the Company’s executive offices. When it seeks nominees for directors, our governance and nominations committee takes into account a variety of factors including (a) ensuring that the board, as a whole, is diverse and consists of individuals with various and relevant career experience, relevant technical skills, industry knowledge and experience, financial expertise (including expertise that could qualify a director as a “financial expert”, as that term is defined by the rules of the SEC), local or community ties and (b) minimum individual qualifications, including strength of character, mature judgment, familiarity with the Company’s business and industry, independence of thought and an ability to work collegially. The Company is of the view that the continuing service of qualified incumbents promotes stability and continuity in the board room, contributing to the ability of the board of directors to work as a collective body, while giving the Company the benefit of the familiarity and insight into the Company’s affairs that its directors have accumulated during their tenure. Accordingly, the process of the governance and nominations committee for identifying nominees reflects the Company’s practice of re-nominating incumbent directors who continue to satisfy the committee’s criteria for membership on the board of directors, whom the committee believes continue to make important contributions to the board of directors and who consent to continue their service on the board of directors. The board has not adopted a formal policy with respect to its consideration of diversity and does not follow any ratio or formula to determine the appropriate mix; rather, it uses its judgment to identify nominees whose backgrounds, attributes and experiences, taken as a whole, will contribute to the high standards of board service. The governance and nominations committee may adopt, and periodically review and revise as it deems appropriate, procedures regarding director candidates proposed by stockholders;

66


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Reviewing requisite skills and criteria for new board members and board composition.  The governance and nominations committee reviews with the entire board of directors, on an annual basis, the requisite skills and criteria for board candidates and the composition of the board as a whole;
Hiring of search firms to identify director nominees.  The governance and nominations committee has the authority to retain search firms to assist in identifying board candidates, approve the terms of the search firm’s engagement, and cause the Company to pay the engaged search firm’s engagement fee;
Selection of committee members.  The governance and nominations committee recommends to the board of directors on an annual basis the directors to be appointed to each committee of the board of directors;
Evaluation of the board of directors.  The governance and nominations committee will oversee an annual self-evaluation of the board of directors and its committees to determine whether it and its committees are functioning effectively;
Evaluation of the board of directors.  The governance and nominations committee will oversee an annual self-evaluation of the board of directors and its committees to determine whether it and its committees are functioning effectively; and
Development of Corporate Governance Guidelines.  The governance and nominations committee will develop and recommend to the board a set of corporate governance guidelines applicable to the Company.

The governance and nominations committee may delegate any of its responsibilities to subcommittees as it deems appropriate. The governance and nominations committee is authorized to retain independent legal and other advisors, and conduct or authorize investigations into any matter within the scope of its duties.

Involvement in Certain Legal Proceedings

To the best of our knowledge, none of our directors or executive officers has, during the past ten years:

been convicted in a criminal proceeding or been subject to a pending criminal proceeding (excluding traffic violations and other minor offenses);
had any bankruptcy petition filed by or against the business or property of the person, or of any partnership, corporation or business association of which he was a general partner or executive officer, either at the time of the bankruptcy filing or within two years prior to that time;
been subject to any order, judgment, or decree, not subsequently reversed, suspended or vacated, of any court of competent jurisdiction or federal or state authority, permanently or temporarily enjoining, barring, suspending or otherwise limiting, his involvement in any type of business, securities, futures, commodities, investment, banking, savings and loan, or insurance activities, or to be associated with persons engaged in any such activity;
been found by a court of competent jurisdiction in a civil action or by the Securities and Exchange Commission or the Commodity Futures Trading Commission to have violated a federal or state securities or commodities law, and the judgment has not been reversed, suspended, or vacated;
been the subject of, or a party to, any federal or state judicial or administrative order, judgment, decree, or finding, not subsequently reversed, suspended or vacated (not including any settlement of a civil proceeding among private litigants), relating to an alleged violation of any federal or state securities or commodities law or regulation, any law or regulation respecting financial institutions or insurance companies including, but not limited to, a temporary or permanent injunction, order of disgorgement or restitution, civil money penalty or temporary or permanent cease-and-desist order, or removal or prohibition order, or any law or regulation prohibiting mail or wire fraud or fraud in connection with any business entity; or

67


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

been the subject of, or a party to, any sanction or order, not subsequently reversed, suspended or vacated, of any self-regulatory organization (as defined in Section 3(a)(26) of the Exchange Act), any registered entity (as defined in Section 1(a)(29) of the Commodity Exchange Act), or any equivalent exchange, association, entity or organization that has disciplinary authority over its members or persons associated with a member.

Except as set forth in our discussion below in “Certain Relationships and Related Transactions,” none of our directors or executive officers has been involved in any transactions with us or any of our directors, executive officers, affiliates or associates which are required to be disclosed pursuant to the rules and regulations of the Commission.

Family Relationships

There are no relationships between any of the officers or directors of the Company.

68


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

Summary Compensation Table

The following table summarizes information regarding the compensation awarded to, earned by or paid to, our Executive Chairman, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and our two other most highly compensated executive officers during 2013 and 2012. We refer to these individuals in this report as our named executive officers.

             
Name and Principal Position   Year   Salary
($)
  Cash
Bonus
($)
  Stock Awards ($)(1)   Option Awards ($)(2)   All Other Compensation ($)(3)   Total
($)
George F. Schmitt
Executive Chairman(4)
    2013       150,000       0       0       0       0       150,000  
Richard L. Mooers
Executive Chairman(5)
    2012       357,500       0       8,409       0       18,809       384,718  
       2013       357,500       0       0       12,894       19,414       389,808  
John C. Coleman
Chief Executive Officer
    2012       250,000       0       5,308       0       44,707       300,015  
       2013       250,000                0       51,578       45,082       346,660  
Roger G. Branton
Chief Financial Officer
    2012       275,000       0       6,468       0       10,780       292,248  
       2013       275,000                0       38,683       12,442       326,125  
James Woodyatt
President
    2012       165,000       0       3,881       0       1,729       170,610  
       2013       165,000                0       38,683       4,676       208,359  
Joe Bobier
Chief Technology Officer(6)
    2012       275,000       0       6,468       0       10,979       292,447  
       2013       275,000                0       5,071       12,327       292,398  

(1) Amounts represent corporate performance-related bonuses to be paid in stock.
(2) Amounts relate to grants of stock options made under the 2013 Stock Incentive Plan. With respect to each stock option grant, the amounts disclosed generally reflect the grant date fair value computed in accordance with FASB ASC Topic 718 “Stock Compensation”.
(3) Includes employer-paid insurance and, for Mr. Coleman, a housing allowance.
(4) Mr. Schmitt became Executive Chairman of the Board on July 19, 2013.
(5) Mr. Mooers served in the position of Executive Chairman of the Board from inception until July 19, 2013. Mr. Mooers will continue to serve as a Director of the Company.
(6) As of December 31, 2013, Mr. Bobier is no longer an executive officer of the Company.

Executive Compensation Program Components

Base Salary

We provide base salary as a fixed source of compensation for our executive officers, allowing them a degree of certainty when having a meaningful portion of their compensation “at risk” in the form of equity awards covering the shares of a company for whose shares there has been limited liquidity to date. The board of directors recognizes the importance of base salaries as an element of compensation that helps to attract highly qualified executive talent.

Base salaries for our executive officers were established primarily based on individual negotiations with the executive officers when they joined us and reflect the scope of their anticipated responsibilities, the individual experience they bring, the board members’ experiences and knowledge in compensating similarly situated individuals at other companies, our then-current cash constraints, and a general sense of internal pay equity among our executive officers.

The board does not apply specific formulas in determining base salary increases. In determining base salaries for 2012 for our continuing named executive officers, no adjustments were made to the base salaries of any of

69


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

our named executive officers as the board or compensation committee determined, in their independent judgment and without reliance on any survey data, that existing base salaries, taken together with other elements of compensation, provided sufficient fixed compensation for retention purposes.

Cash Bonuses or Bonuses Paid in Shares

Prior to the initial public offering, our employees, including our executive officers, have been eligible to earn discretionary performance bonuses based on individual performance. The amount of individual bonus earned was determined in a subjective manner, without specific weightings or a formula.

In 2012, we set targets for the award of corporate performance-related bonuses, expressed as a percentage of base salary, for our employees, including our executive officers. The overall corporate performance of the Company, as evaluated by our board, was with reference to specific pre-established corporate goals, and was the critical factor for determining corporate performance-related bonuses. Each participant could earn an annual bonus of up to 100% of his earned base salary, which our board felt was an appropriate percentage given such payment can be paid in stock or cash at the board’s discretion.

For our 2012 bonus program, our Chief Executive Officer established, in consultation with the board, objectives and key results, for officers and senior management which also applied to all employees of the Company.

Bonus accruals for the 2011 and 2012 calendar years were paid on February 5, 2014 and February 18, 2014 through the issuance of 82,335 and 16,867 common shares. The bonus awarded was allocated to general & administrative and development expenses in 2011 and 2012. During 2013, $2,335,000 of salary expense was reversed to account for the decrease in the fair market value of the accrued bonus from $2,633,000 at December 31, 2012 to $298,000 at December 31, 2013. The reason for the decrease is related to the decrease in the stock price of common shares used for settlement.

In 2013, we again set targets for the award of corporate performance-related bonuses; however, those targets were not met and no performance-related bonuses were paid out. We have not yet set any targets for the award of corporate performance-related bonuses for 2014.

Equity Compensation

As a majority-held company, we have historically used options as the principal component of our executive compensation program. Consistent with our compensation objectives, we believe this approach has allowed us to attract and retain key talent and aligned our executive team’s contributions with the long-term interests of the company and our stockholders. We grant stock options with an exercise price not less than the fair market value of our common stock on the date of grant, so these options will have value to our executive officers only if the fair market value of our common stock increases after the date of grant and the date of vesting. Typically, stock options granted to our executive officers vest over three years.

In addition, our board has approved certain executive grants of options containing accelerated vesting provisions upon an involuntary termination (both termination without cause and resignation for good reason) as well as upon certain material change in control transactions. Our board believes these accelerated vesting provisions reflect current market practices, based on the collective knowledge and experiences of our board members (and without reference to specific peer group data), and allow us to attract and retain highly qualified executive officers. In addition, we believe these accelerated vesting provisions will allow our executive officers to focus on closing a transaction that may be in the best interest of our stockholders even though the transaction may otherwise result in a termination of their employment and, absent such accelerated vesting, a forfeiture of their unvested equity awards. Additional information regarding accelerated vesting prior to, upon or following a change in control is discussed below under “— Potential Payments Upon Termination or Change in Control.”

In determining the form, size and material terms of executive equity awards, our board customarily considered, among other things, individual negotiations with the executive officers at their time of hire, the executive officer’s total compensation opportunity, the need to create a meaningful opportunity for reward predicated on the creation of long-term stockholder value, internal pay equity as among our executive officers, notable performance accomplishments, adjustments to duties and the retention implications of existing grants.

70


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Our board of directors made the grants to our executive officers set forth below. In determining the size of the equity grants, our board generally considered the CEO’s recommendations, the executive officer’s existing equity award holdings (including the unvested portion of such awards), internal pay equity, our retention and incentive goals, and, as applicable, negotiations with the executive at the time of his hiring. In particular, the board awarded the following options:

         
Name   Exercise price
per share
  Date of grant   Date from which
exercisable
(vest over three years)
  Expiry date   Number of
options
John Coleman   $ 1.63       11/19/2013       11/19/2014       11/19/2023       40,000  
Roger Branton   $ 1.63       11/19/2013       11/19/2014       11/19/2023       30,000  
James Woodyatt   $ 1.63       11/19/2013       11/19/2014       11/19/2023       30,000  
Joseph Bobier   $ 1.63       11/19/2013       12/31/2013       11/19/2023       7,500  

Employment Agreements

The Company has an employment agreement with its CEO, John Coleman, for a term of three years with automatic renewals unless terminated. Mr. Coleman’s agreement was effective on August 1, 2011. It provides that he will receive a salary of no less than $250,000 per year, subject to annual increases as determined by the Board. In addition, he is entitled to incentive compensation not to exceed two (2) times his base salary. The incentive compensation is payable in shares of common stock at the Company’s discretion. He is also entitled to participate in all other benefits that the Company may provide to other senior executives. The agreement contains a non-compete and non-solicitation provision.

Outstanding Equity Awards at Fiscal Year-End 2013

The following table presents information regarding outstanding options held by our named executive officers as of December 31, 2013:

       
  Option Awards
     Number of Securities
Underlying
Unexercised Options (#)
Exercisable
  Number of Securities
Underlying
Unexercised Options (#)
Unexercisable
  Option
Exercise
Price
($)
  Option
Expiration date
George Schmitt     1,428             8.40       2/23/2020  
Total     1,428                          
Richard Mooers(1)     30,714             19.25       1/2/2015  
       78,571             70.00       1/19/2016  
             10,000 (3)      1.63       11/19/2023  
Total     109,285       10,000                    
John Coleman     1,428             8.75       3/8/2020  
       14,285             7.00       6/16/2020  
       19,048       9,523 (4)      8.75       4/14/2021  
             40,000 (5)      1.63       11/19/2023  
Total     34,761       49,523                    
Roger Branton(2)     30,714             19.25       1/2/2015  
       78,571             70.00       1/19/2016  
             30,000 (6)      1.63       11/19/2023  
Total     109,285       30,000                    
James Woodyatt     21,428             192.50       1/10/2017  
       6,666       3,334 (4)      7.88       4/14/2021  
             30,000       1.63       11/19/2023  
Total     28,094       33,334                    
Joseph Bobier     28,571             9.45       3/1/2014  
       2,857             70.00       1/19/2016  
       4,761       2,381 (4)      7.88       4/14/2021  
       7,500             1.63       11/19/2023  
Total     43,689       2,381                    

71


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(1) Held by family entities or trusts for the benefit of the children of Richard Mooers and his wife.
(2) Held by trusts and entities for the benefit of Roger Branton, his wife and minor children.
(3) 3,333 of these options vest on November 19, 2014, 3,333 vest on November 19, 2015 and 3,334 vest on November 19, 2016.
(4) The balance of these options vest on April 14, 2014.
(5) 13,333 of these options vest on November 19, 2014, 13,333 vest on November 19, 2015 and 13,334 vest on November 19, 2016.
(6) 10,000 of these options vest on November 19, 2014, 10,000 vest on November 19, 2015 and 10,000 vest on November 19, 2016.

Director Compensation

The Company compensates our non-employee directors on a negotiated basis including expenses for their service. Each of these directors received compensation in the amount of $15,000 annually payable quarterly or the same value in shares of the Company, based on the director’s determination. In addition, they received awards of 14,285 options in September of 2012 with a strike price of $15.75 and 10,000 in November of 2013 with a strike price of $1.63. Each award has a vesting schedule of one-third vesting each year on the anniversary date over three (3) years.

The table below summarizes the compensation earned by our non-employee directors for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013.

             
Name   Fees earned
or paid in
cash
($)
  Stock
Awards
($)
  Option
Awards
($)
  Non-equity
incentive plan
compensation
($)
  Change in
pension value
and
nonqualified
deferred
compensation
earnings
($)
  All Other
Compensation
($)
  Total
($)
Gary Cuccio     6,780       0       12,895       0       0       0       19,675  
Kenneth Hoffman     0       6,780       12,895       0       0       0       19,675  
Raymond Sidney     0       6,780       12,895       0       0       0       19,675  
Larry Townes     0       6,780       12,895       0       0       0       19,675  

72


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT

The following table sets forth certain information regarding the beneficial ownership of our Common Stock as of March 31, 2014 by (a) each stockholder who is known to us to own beneficially 5% or more of our outstanding Common Stock; (b) all directors; (c) our executive officers, and (d) all executive officers and directors as a group. Except as otherwise indicated, all persons listed below have (i) sole voting power and investment power with respect to their shares of Common Stock, except to the extent that authority is shared by spouses under applicable law, and (ii) record and beneficial ownership with respect to their shares of Common Stock.

For purposes of this table, a person or group of persons is deemed to have “beneficial ownership” of any shares of common stock that such person has the right to acquire within 60 days of March 31, 2014. For purposes of computing the percentage of outstanding shares of our common stock held by each person or group of persons named above, any shares that such person or persons has the right to acquire within 60 days of March 31, 2014 is deemed to be outstanding, but is not deemed to be outstanding for the purpose of computing the percentage ownership of any other person. The inclusion herein of any shares listed as beneficially owned does not constitute an admission of beneficial ownership. Unless otherwise identified, the address of our directors and officers is c/o xG Technology, Inc., 240 S. Pineapple Avenue, Suite 701, Sarasota, Florida 34236.

   
Name and address of beneficial owner:   Amount and Nature of Beneficial Ownership   Percent of class of Common Stock(1)
5% Stockholders:
                 
MBTH(2)     8,306,360       39.70  
Named Executive Officers and Directors:
                 
George F. Schmitt(3)     11,294,978       52.42  
John C. Coleman(4)     60,936       *  
Roger G. Branton(5)     8,539,844       40.53  
James Woodyatt(6)     38,370       *  
Belinda Marino(7)     3,784       *  
Gary Cuccio(8)     4,762       *  
Richard L. Mooers(9)     8,953,554       42.22  
Ken Hoffman(10)     9,181       *  
Raymond M. Sidney(11)     7,753       *  
Larry Townes(11)     7,753       *  
All executive officers and directors as a group (10 persons):     12,308,479       55.73  

* Less than 1%
(1) Based on 18,800,564 shares of common stock issued and outstanding as of March 31, 2014. Shares of common stock subject to options or warrants currently exercisable or exercisable within 60 days, are deemed outstanding for purposes of computing the percentage of the person holding such options or warrants, but are not deemed outstanding for purposes of computing the percentage of any other person.
(2) Includes 2,120,778 shares of common stock underlying options and warrants that are presently exercisable.
(3) Includes 2,363,023 shares of common stock and 625,595 shares of common stock underlying options and warrants that are presently exercisable, held directly by Mr. Schmitt, and 6,185,582 shares of common stock and warrants and 2,120,778 shares of common stock underlying options and warrants that are presently exercisable, beneficially owned through MBTH. Mr. Schmitt has a direct 36.34% ownership interest in MBTH. In addition, Mr. Schmitt, through his employment agreement as CEO of MBTH, has been granted an option to purchase MBTH shares sufficient to give him five percent (5%) of the equity ownership of MBTH shares, based on MBTH’s total capitalization as of the date of execution of his employment agreement with MBTH and fully diluted to incorporate all shares issued and amounts paid in the exercise of such options.

73


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(4) Includes 11,005 shares of common stock and 49,931 shares of common stock underlying options and warrants that are presently exercisable.
(5) Includes 72,647 shares of common stock and 146,552 shares of common stock underlying options and warrants that are presently exercisable, beneficially owned through Branton Partners, LLC, of which Mr. Branton is a 100% owner, 14,285 shares beneficially owned through Mooers Branton and Company (“MBC”), of which Mr. Branton is a 20% owner, and 6,185,582 shares of common stock and 2,120,778 shares of common stock underlying options and warrants that are presently exercisable, beneficially owned through MBTH. Mr. Branton beneficially holds 20% of the issued share capital of MB Merchant Group, LLC, which has a 45.23% ownership interest in MBTH.
(6) Includes 4,085 shares of common stock and 34,285 shares of common stock underlying options that are presently exercisable.
(7) Includes 3,784 shares of common stock underlying options that are presently exercisable.
(8) Includes 4,762 shares of common stock underlying options that are presently exercisable.
(9) Richard Mooers holds no direct or indirect legal interest in shares, options or warrants in the Company but family entities and trusts for the benefit of his and his wife’s children hold 80% of the share capital of MBMG and MBC. MBTH owns 6,185,582 shares of common stock and 2,120,778 shares of common stock underlying options that are presently exercisable in xG. MBMG owns 45.23% of MBTH. Mooers Partners, LLC (“MP”) owns 290,590 shares of common stock and 258,352 shares of common stock underlying options and warrants that are presently exercisable in xG. MP is owned by various trusts for the benefit of Mr. Mooers’ children. Additionally, a trust for the benefit of Mr. Mooers’ children also owns 55,025 shares of common stock and 27,513 shares of common stock underlying warrants that are presently exercisable in xG. MBC directly owns 14,285 shares of xG. And 1,714 shares of xG are held by Mr. Mooers’ children directly. As the children reside in Mr. Mooers’ household, he is required to claim beneficial ownership and does.
(10) Includes 2,991 shares of common stock and 6,190 shares of common stock underlying options that are presently exercisable.
(11) Includes 2,991 shares of common stock and 4,762 shares of common stock underlying options that are presently exercisable.

74


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS

Other than compensation arrangements, the following is a description of transactions to which we were a participant or will be a participant to, in which:

the amounts involved exceeded or will exceed the lesser of 1% of our total assets or $120,000; and
any of our directors, executive officers or holders of more than 5% of our capital stock, or any member of the immediate family of the foregoing persons, had or will have a direct or indirect material interest.

Our Audit Committee considers and approves or disapproves any related person transaction as required by NASDAQ regulations.

Assumption of liabilities by MBTH

Effective July 1, 2011, we entered into an informal agreement with MBTH whereby MBTH assumed certain of our liabilities totaling $3.0 million, including certain payroll, management fees and other operating costs in the amount of $250,000 per month for a period of twelve months ended June 30, 2012. In consideration for this agreement, we issued 342,857 new shares to MBTH on June 23, 2011 at a price of $8.75 per share. On July 1, 2012 the agreement with MBTH to assume liabilities of the Company expired. Subsequent to the assumption of liability agreement and through December 31, 2012, MBTH paid additional liabilities on behalf of the Company amounting to $1,259,000. During 2013, MBTH paid additional liabilities on the behalf of the Company of approximately $2,506,000, the Company repaid MBTH $1,065,000 for liabilities previously paid by MBTH, and the Company refinanced $1,013,000 of liabilities previously paid by MBTH into the Bridge Loan (see Note 9 — Convertible Notes Payable) for a net increase in the related party liability of $428,000. The due to related party balance was $1,526,000 as of December 31, 2013. The due to related party balance was $1,331,000 as of March 4, 2014.

Convertible Shareholder Loans from MBTH

On May 19, 2011, we entered into a convertible promissory note (as modified by agreement on January 16, 2013, the “May 2011 Convertible Note”) whereby MBTH agreed to make available to us at its sole and absolute discretion principal advances in the amount of up to $15 million (subject to increase by mutual agreement). The loan was payable on final maturity, May 19, 2016, or earlier demand, and was convertible, at MBTH’s option, into our shares at a price of $26.25 per share. Interest was payable semi-annually in cash or shares, at our option, at the rate of 8% per year. Additionally, a facility fee of 2% was payable by us at maturity. The loan facility was secured against substantially all of our assets.

As of December 31, 2012, the Company had drawn down $17.2 million of principal balance under the May 2011 Convertible Note. The Company drew down an additional $450,000 on the May 2011 Convertible Note with MBTH from January 1, 2013 through January 16, 2013 to finance operating activities of the Company. As of December 31, 2012 the company had accrued interest and fees under the May 2011 Convertible Note of $1.1 million and the Company accrued additional interest and fees of $266,000 from January 1, 2013 through January 16, 2013.

On January 16, 2013, a committee of the independent (non-MBTH affiliated) directors decided that, subject to the Company having sufficient authorized capital, the conversion price of the principal advanced under the May 2011 Convertible Loan would be decreased from $26.25 to $13.30 per share (or any other such price as may be approved by the board before conversion having regard to the issue price per common share of any future equity financing of the Company by a third party) (the “Modified Strike Price”) and, in addition, the Company would issue to MBTH an additional 142,857 common shares upon the exercise in full of its conversion rights, termination of the May 2011 Convertible Loan and the discharge of all MBTH’s collateral over the Company’s assets.

The Company agreed to modify the exercise price on two options representing 571,428 underlying common shares granted to MBTH under the February 2011 Convertible Loan from $17.50 with respect to an option for 285,714 underlying shares and $35.00 with respect to an option for 285,714 common shares to the Modified Strike Price of $13.30. The Company also agreed to compensate MBTH for funding and other costs assumed by MBTH by issuing MBTH 16,474 common shares at the Modified Strike Price for the difference between

75


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

the interest rate of 8% that the Company owed to MBTH under the May 2011 Convertible Loan and the interest rate of 9.5% that MBTH pays to investors for monies raised by MBTH.

The Company agreed to grant MBTH a warrant to subscribe for 42,857 common shares (the “42,857 Warrant”) with an exercise price of $0.35 per share. The warrant is contingent upon shareholders of MBTH electing to exercise a warrant issued to them by MBTH (the “MBTH Warrant”) in xG Technology, Inc. common shares. If the MBTH shareholder elect not to exercise the MBTH Warrant or they elect to exercise a portion or all of the MBTH Warrant into shares of MBTH, a proportionate number of common shares under the 42,857 Warrant will be issued to MBTH.

The Company agreed to award MBTH an option for 142,857 common shares with an exercise price equal to $8.75 per share.

On January 16, 2013, in consideration of the terms above, MBTH gave the Company notice to its intention to exercise the conversion rights on the 2011 Convertible Loan. On March 26, 2013, the Company issued 1,127,819 common shares to MBTH in consideration of the conversion rights under the May 2011 Convertible Note to convert the principal balance of $15.0 million principal balance into common shares at $13.30 per share and 142,857 common shares were issued for the discharge of MBTH’s collateral over the Company’s assets. The remaining principal balance and accrued interest and fees of $4.04 million, related to the 2011 Convertible Note, were converted into the Bridge Loan principal balance. The additional consideration described above was considered an induced conversion of the 2011 Convertible Loan. The Company recorded an inducement charge for the differential in the value of securities issued to the debt holder under the original terms compared to the value of securities issued to the debt holder under the amended terms. Additionally, the modification of options were accounted for as an inducement charge based upon the valuation of the option immediately prior to the amendment compared to the value of the option with the amended terms. As a result of the modified terms, the Company recorded a debt inducement charge of $14.1 million during the year ended December 31, 2013. The inducement charge was recorded as a reduction and increase to additional paid in capital as MBTH is a related party.

The Company agreed to award MBTH a 3% cash success fee if MBTH arranges additional financing for the Company by a third party (other than the Bridge Loan) or arranges a merger, consolidation or sale by the Company of substantially all of the assets to a third party.

Under a subscription agreement and convertible promissory note between the Company and MBTH dated January 16, 2013, MBTH committed to advance to the Company $5 million as part of a new convertible bridge loan for up to an aggregate of $10 million. The Bridge Loan is to refinance principal advances by MBTH under the May 2011 Shareholder Loan in excess of $15 million, all accrued interest and fees under the May 2011 Shareholder Loan and for general corporate purposes including; additional working capital and product development. The Bridge Loan was for a term of one year and is convertible, at each loan note holder’s option, into common shares at any time prior to final maturity at 95% of the price of any future equity financing completed by us (including the Initial Public Offering). Interest is payable at 20% per annum, semi-annually in cash or shares, at the option of each loan note holder. The Bridge Loan may be prepaid in whole (or in part), subject to payment of a minimum of six months’ interest if prepaid within the first six months. We may redeem 50% of the Bridge Loan without prepayment penalty by forcing a conversion into shares, provided that the shares are marginable and freely tradable on a liquid exchange, and provided further that, if such forced conversion is effected within six months from the date of the Bridge Loan, then we shall pay six month’s interest on the unpaid and unconverted principal balance of the Bridge Loan immediately before such forced conversion (such interest being payable in cash or shares, at the option of each loan note holder). For every $350 of principal amount of Bridge Loan advanced by MBTH, the loan note holder was issued one warrant to subscribe one share at a subscription price of $0.35 per share. The warrants are exercisable for a period of five years from issuance. We agreed to pay an origination fee of 5% to note holders.

On July 18, 2013, we exercised our right to force a conversion of 50% of the then outstanding principal balance under the Bridge Loan Agreement and received notification of intent to convert the remaining 50% of the principal balance under the Bridge Loan and all accrued interest and fees from MBTH and other non-related investors that investors holding a total principal balance under the Bridge Loan of $8,910,000 and accrued interest and fees of approximately $1,355,000.

76


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

On August 7, 2013, we repaid $125,000 to a non-related investor for investment into the Bridge Loan.

On August 22, 2013, we refinanced approximately $1,013,000 of liabilities previously paid by MBTH during 2013 on our behalf through the Bridge Loan and incurred an origination fee of approximately $50,000. We received notification from MBTH of their intent to convert the principal balance and accrued fees and interest of $101,000.

On August 22, 2013, we issued 2,187,529 common shares for the conversion of the balance of approximately $11,429,000 in principal and accrued interest and fees at a price per share of $5.225. Additionally, we issued warrants to purchase 1,093,778 underlying shares as additional consideration to the investors who exercised their conversion option. The warrants vested immediately and are exercisable into common shares at an exercise price of $6.87 per share and have a term of five years from the date of issuance.

One-time Ageement with MBTH

On September 30, 2013, directors of the Company not related with MBTH authorized a onetime agreement, whereby we issued to MBTH 1,599,453 shares of our common stock and a warrant to purchase 1,363,636 shares of our common stock at an exercise price of $6.87 per share for the difference in price between the shares issued to them in March 2013 at a price of $13.30 per share in exchange for the conversion of its 2011 Convertible Note and the $5.50 purchase price for shares sold in our initial public offering in July 2013. Additionally, the Modified Strike Price, agreed upon between the Company and MBTH in January 2013, of $13.30 per share for the two options representing 571,428 underlying shares granted to MBTH in February 2011 has been lowered to $5.50.

Due from Related Party

On November 20, 2013, the Company paid $1,350,000 to MBTH which is recorded as a related party receivable as of December 31, 2013. On January 7, 2014, MBTH paid the company $1,350,000 in repayment of the receivable balance.

Mooers Branton & Co., Incorporated

On March 2, 2006, we entered into a management agreement with Mooers Branton & Co. Incorporated, a Florida corporation, pursuant to which MBC agreed to provide certain management and financial services to us for a monthly fee of $80,000. The management agreement was effective January 1, 2006 and the liability to pay the fee was assumed for twelve months by MBTH on July 1, 2011. MBC is beneficially controlled and operated by Rick Mooers and Roger Branton.

Pursuant to the management agreement, MBC will provide services to us, which will include, but are not limited to, financial advice, strategic and financial planning, capital structure analysis and planning, and business development. In addition, MBC will provide certain office facilities, telephone and back-office administration as well as the services of a full-time office manager and administrator with other part-time assistance from time to time.

We incurred fees related to the management agreement of $960,000 in the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, of which $960,000 was assumed by MBTH in 2013 and 2012. These fees were recorded as an expense under general and administrative expenses and accrued under due to related party. These fees to MBC were separate to the compensation received by Rick Mooers and Roger Branton as officers of the Company.

Subsidiaries of Townes Tele-Communications, Inc. (“Townes Tele-Communications”)

On September 4, 2012, we entered into an Equipment Purchase Agreement and an Engineering Services Agreement with Northeast Florida Telephone Company, Inc. (“NEFCOM”), a MacClenny, Florida-based provider of local phone, long distance, Internet services and telephone equipment that is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Townes Tele-Communications. The purchase consisted of $2.4 million for xMax® cognitive radio networking equipment, including xMax® wireless access points, an xMSC mobile switching center, and xMod personal hotspots, and an estimated $0.9 million for engineering services. Under the terms of the order, we will be paid upon the delivery of xMax® equipment to NEFCOM.

77


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Similarly, on November 24, 2012, we entered into Equipment Purchase Agreements and Engineering Services Agreements under substantially the same terms with the following other wholly-owned subsidiaries of Townes Tele-Communications: Electra Telephone Company and Tatum Telephone Company (both based in Texas); Choctaw Telephone Company and MoKanDial Telephone Company (both based in Kansas); Haxtun Telephone Company (based in Colorado); and Walnut Hill Telephone Company (based in Arkansas) The purchases consisted in aggregate of $2.0 million for the purchase of xMax® cognitive radio networking equipment and an estimated $2.1 million for engineering services and other hardware.

Given that Larry Townes is one of our directors, and he is also a substantial shareholder of Townes Tele-Communications, the entering into the equipment purchase agreements and engineering services agreements described above by us are considered to be related party transactions.

On October 16, 2013, we completed the first delivery of our xMax comprehensive cognitive radio system, shipping equipment required to fulfill the $155,000 purchase order that was received from rural broadband provider Walnut Hill Telephone Company on November 26, 2012. Larry Townes is Chairman of Townes Tele-Communications, Inc., the parent company of Walnut Hill Telephone Company. Given that Larry Townes is a director of xG Technology, the sale of equipment to Walnut Hill Telephone Company is considered to be a related party transaction. Due to Walnut Hill Telephone Company waiting for the equipment to meet certain technical specifications, the revenue from this transaction is considered deferred revenue as of December 31, 2013.

On December 16, 2013, we sold our xMax comprehensive cognitive radio system to Haxtun Telephone Company for $301,000 to fulfill a purchase order that was received on November 24, 2012. Larry Townes is Chairman of Townes Tele-Communications, Inc., the parent company of Haxtun Telephone Company. Given that Larry Townes is a director of xG Technology, the sale of equipment to Haxtun Telephone Company is considered to be a related party transaction. Due to Haxtun Telephone Company waiting for the equipment to meet certain technical specifications, the revenue from this transaction is considered deferred revenue as of December 31, 2013.

78


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES

General

The following description of our capital stock and certain provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws are summaries and are qualified by reference to the amended and restated certificate of incorporation and the amended and restated bylaws. Copies of these documents will be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part.

Our authorized capital stock consists of 300,000,000 shares of common stock, with a par value of $0.00001 per share, and 10,000,000 shares of “blank check” preferred stock. As of March 31, 2014, we had outstanding 18,800,564 shares of common stock.

Common Stock

Reverse Stock Splits

Effective March 25, 2013, we amended our certificate of incorporation to increase our authorized common stock from 250,000,000 shares to 300,000,000 shares. At that time, we also reduced our par value per common share from $0.01 to $0.00001. At that time, we also authorized the establishment of blank check preferred stock, effective as of that date that our Registration Statement on Form S-1 (Registration No. 333-187094) became effective, which occurred on July 18, 2013.

On March 24, 2013, we effected a 1-for-25 reverse stock split and on March 28, 2013 we effected a 1-for-1.4 reverse stock split. Upon the effectiveness of the first reverse stock split, every 25 shares of outstanding common stock decreased to one share of common stock. Similarly, the number of shares of common stock into which each outstanding option and warrant to purchase common stock is exercisable decreased on a 1-for-25 basis and the exercise price of each outstanding option and warrant to purchase common stock increased proportionately. Upon the effectiveness of the second reverse stock split, every 1.4 shares of outstanding common stock decreased to one share of common stock and the number of shares of common stock into which each outstanding option and warrant to purchase common stock is exercisable decreased on a 1-for-1.4 basis and the exercise price of each outstanding option and warrant to purchase common stock increased proportionately. The purpose of the second reverse split was to provide for a cumulative or aggregate reverse split of 1-for-35 taking into account both reverse stock splits.

Unless otherwise indicated, all references to share numbers in this prospectus filed as part of this registration statement reflect the effects of these reverse stock splits.

Voting Rights

Each Stockholder has one vote for each share of common stock held on all matters submitted to a vote of stockholders. A shareholder may vote in person or by proxy. Elections of directors are determined by a plurality of the votes cast and all other matters are decided by a majority of the votes cast by those Shareholders entitled to vote and present in person or by proxy.

Because our stockholders do not have cumulative voting rights, stockholders holding a majority of the voting power of our shares of common stock will be able to elect all of our directors. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws provides that stockholder actions may be effected at a duly called meeting of stockholders or pursuant to written consent of the majority of shareholders. A special meeting of stockholders may be called by the majority of our board of directors or by a committee determined by the board of directors with power to call such meetings.

Dividend Rights

The holders of outstanding shares of common stock are entitled to receive dividends out of funds legally available at the times and in the amounts that our board may determine, provided that required dividends, if any, on preferred stock have been paid or provided for. However, to date we have not paid or declared cash distributions or dividends on our common stock and do not currently intend to pay cash dividends on our common stock in the foreseeable future. We intend to retain all earnings, if and when generated, to finance our operations. The declaration of cash dividends in the future will be determined by the board based upon our earnings, financial condition, capital requirements and other relevant factors.

79


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

No Preemptive or Similar Rights

Holders of our common stock do not have preemptive rights, and our common stock is not convertible or redeemable.

Right to Receive Liquidation Distributions

Upon our dissolution, liquidation or winding-up, the assets legally available for distribution to our stockholders and remaining after payment to holders of preferred stock of the amounts, if any, to which they are entitled, are distributable ratably among the holders of our common stock subject to any senior class of securities.

Preferred Stock

The Company has authorized 10,000,000 shares of undesignated preferred stock, none of which is outstanding.

Options and Other Warrants

As of March 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, we had outstanding options and warrants to purchase 5,177,969 shares of common stock as set forth in the table below:

   
  2014
Number of options
  2013
Number of options
At January 1     5,229,076       1,295,189  
Granted           3,986,829  
Forfeited     (51,107 )      (52,084 ) 
Exercised           (858 ) 
Unexercised as at March 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013     5,177,969       5,229,076  

The weighted average exercise prices March 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013 were $10.58 and $10.57 respectively.

Anti-Takeover Provisions

Since our board of directors has the power to retain and discharge our officers, these provisions could make it more difficult for existing stockholders or another party to effect a change in management. In addition, the authorization of undesignated preferred stock makes it possible for our board of directors to issue preferred stock with voting or other rights or preferences that could impede the success of any attempt to change our control.

These provisions are intended to enhance the likelihood of continued stability in the composition of our board of directors and its policies and to discourage certain types of transactions that may involve an actual or threatened acquisition of us.

These provisions are also designed to reduce our vulnerability to an unsolicited acquisition proposal and to discourage certain tactics that may be used in proxy fights. However, such provisions could have the effect of discouraging others from making tender offers for our shares and may have the effect of deterring hostile takeovers or delaying changes in our control or management. As a consequence, these provisions also may inhibit fluctuations in the market price of our stock that could result from actual or rumored takeover attempts.

Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law

We are subject to Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, which prohibits a Delaware corporation from engaging in any “business combination” with any interested stockholder for a period of three years after the date that such stockholder became an interested stockholder, with the following exceptions:

before such date, the board of directors of the corporation approved either the business combination or the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder;

80


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

upon closing of the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, the interested stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock of the corporation outstanding at the time the transaction began, excluding for purposes of determining the voting stock outstanding (but not the outstanding voting stock owned by the interested stockholder) those shares owned (i) by persons who are directors and also officers and (ii) employee stock plans in which employee participants do not have the right to determine confidentially whether shares held subject to the plan will be tendered in a tender or exchange offer; or
on or after such date, the business combination is approved by the board of directors and authorized at an annual or special meeting of the stockholders, and not by written consent, by the affirmative vote of at least 66 2/3% of the outstanding voting stock that is not owned by the interested stockholder.

In general, Section 203 defines business combination to include the following:

any merger or consolidation involving the corporation and the interested stockholder;
any sale, transfer, pledge or other disposition of 10% or more of the assets of the corporation involving the interested stockholder;
subject to certain exceptions, any transaction that results in the issuance or transfer by the corporation of any stock of the corporation to the interested stockholder;
any transaction involving the corporation that has the effect of increasing the proportionate share of the stock of any class or series of the corporation beneficially owned by the interested stockholder; or
the receipt by the interested stockholder of the benefit of any loans, advances, guarantees, pledges or other financial benefits provided by or through the corporation.

In general, Section 203 defines an “interested stockholder” as an entity or person who, together with the person’s affiliates and associates, beneficially owns, or within three years prior to the time of determination of interested stockholder status did own, 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock of the corporation.

Transfer Agent and Registrar

Our transfer agent and registrar for our common stock in the United States is Continental Stock Transfer & Trust Company.

81


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

Future sales of our common stock in the public market, or the availability of such shares for sale in the public market, could adversely affect market prices prevailing from time to time. As described below, only a limited number of shares will be available for sale shortly after this offering due to contractual and legal restrictions on resale. Nevertheless, sales of our common stock in the public market after such restrictions lapse, or the perception that those sales may occur, could adversely affect the prevailing market price at such time and our ability to raise equity capital in the future.

Our common stock has traded on NASDAQ since July 19, 2013.

Based on the number of shares outstanding as of March 31, 2014, upon the closing of this offering [    ] shares of common stock will be issued and outstanding, assuming the underwriters’ over-allotment option is exercised and no exercise of outstanding options or warrants. Of the outstanding shares, all of the shares sold in this offering will be freely tradable, except that any shares held by our affiliates, as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act, may only be sold in compliance with the limitations described below.

Shares of our common stock outstanding after this offering are restricted securities as such term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act and/or are subject to lock-up agreements as described below. Following the expiration of the lock-up period in such agreements, restricted securities may be sold in the public market only if registered or if they qualify for an exemption from registration under the Securities Act, as described in greater detail below.

Rule 144

In general, under Rule 144, a person who has beneficially owned restricted shares of our common stock for at least six months would be entitled to sell their securities provided that (i) such person is not deemed to have been one of our affiliates at the time of, or at any time during the 90 days preceding, a sale and (ii) we have been subject to the Exchange Act, periodic reporting requirements for at least 90 days before the sale. Persons who have beneficially owned restricted shares of our common stock for at least six months but who are our affiliates at the time of, or any time during the 90 days preceding, a sale, would be subject to volume restrictions, by which such person would be entitled to sell within any three-month period only a number of securities that does not exceed the greater of either of the following:

1% of the number of shares of our common stock then outstanding, which will equal approximately [    ] shares immediately after this offering assuming the underwriters’ over-allotment option is exercised in full, based on the number of shares of common stock outstanding as of March 31, 2014; or
the average weekly trading volume of our common stock during the four calendar weeks preceding the filing of a notice on Form 144 with respect to the sale.

Provided, in each case, that we have been subject to and are current with the Exchange Act periodic reporting requirements for at least 90 days before the sale. Sales by affiliates must also comply with the manner of sale and notice provisions of Rule 144.

Rule 701

Rule 701 under the Securities Act permits resales of shares in reliance upon Rule 144 but without compliance with certain restrictions of Rule 144, including the holding period requirement. Most of our employees, executive officers, directors or consultants who purchased shares under a written compensatory plan or contract may be entitled to rely on the resale provisions of Rule 701, but all holders of Rule 701 shares are required to wait until 90 days after the date of this prospectus before selling their shares. However, substantially all Rule 701 shares are subject to lock-up agreements as described below and under “Underwriting” and will become eligible for sale at the expiration of those agreements.

Employees can only sell vested shares. Employees who do not hold vested shares, including shares subject to options, upon expiration of these selling restrictions will not be able to sell shares until they vest.

82


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Lock-Up Arrangements

We have agreed with the underwriter that for a period of three months following the date of this prospectus, we will not offer, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, contract to sell or otherwise dispose of, or hedge, any shares of our common stock or any securities convertible into or exchangeable for shares of our common stock, subject to specified exceptions. The Underwriter may, in its sole discretion, waive this prohibition. The restriction is not applicable to shares issuable upon conversion or exercise of any existing securities.

The restricted period described in the preceding paragraph will be extended if:

during the last 17 days of the restricted period we issue a release regarding earnings or regarding material news or events relating to us; or
prior to the expiration of the restricted period, we announce that we will release earnings results during the 16-day period beginning on the last day of the period,

in which case the restrictions described in the preceding paragraph will continue to apply until the expiration of the 18-day period beginning on the issuance of the earnings release or the occurrence of the material news or material event.

In addition, all officers and directors and their affiliates have agreed not to sell any shares beneficially owned by them for a period of 90 days from the effective date of this Registration Statement. For a more complete discussion of our stock incentive plans, see the section titled “Underwriting — Lock-up Agreements”.

Registration Rights

There are no shareholders who have any right to request registration of their shares.

Stock Incentive Plans

We have filed a Form S-8 registration statement under the Securities Act to register shares of our common stock issued or reserved for issuance under some of our stock incentive plans and agreements. This registration statement will become effective immediately upon filing, and shares covered by this registration statement will thereupon be eligible for sale in the public markets, subject to vesting restrictions, and Rule 144 limitations applicable to affiliates. For a more complete discussion of our stock incentive plans, see the section titled “Executive Compensation — Employee Stock Incentive Plans”.

83


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

UNDERWRITING

Roth Capital Partners, LLC is acting as sole booking-running lead manager of the offering and as representative of the underwriters, or the “Representative.” We have entered into an underwriting agreement, dated, [        ] 2014, with the Representative. Subject to the terms and conditions of the underwriting agreement, we have agreed to sell to each underwriter named below, and each underwriter named below has severally and not jointly agreed to purchase from us, at the public offering price per share less the underwriting discounts set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, the number of shares of common stock listed next to its name in the following table:

 
Name of Underwriter   Number of Shares
Roth Capital Partners, LLC            
Feltl and Company, Inc.         
Total            

The underwriters are committed to purchase all the shares of common stock offered by us, other than those covered by the option to purchase additional shares described below; if any of the shares are purchased. The obligations of the underwriters may be terminated upon the occurrence of certain events specified in the underwriting agreement. Furthermore, pursuant to the underwriting agreement, the underwriters’ obligations are subject to customary conditions, representations and warranties contained in the underwriting agreement, such as receipt by the underwriters of officers’ certificates and legal opinion and no material adverse change to our business.

We have agreed to indemnify the underwriters against specified liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act of 1933, and to contribute to payments the underwriters may be required to make in respect thereof.

The underwriters are offering the shares, subject to prior sale, when, as and if issued to and accepted by them, subject to approval of legal matters by their counsel and other conditions specified in the underwriting agreement. The underwriters reserve the right to withdraw, cancel or modify offers to the public and to reject orders in whole or in part.

Over-allotment Option.  We have granted the underwriters an over-allotment option. This option, which is exercisable for up to 45 days after the date of this prospectus, permits the underwriters to purchase a maximum of [    ] additional shares (15% of the shares sold in this offering) from us to cover over-allotments, if any. If the underwriters exercise all or part of this option, they will purchase shares covered by the option at the public offering price per share that appears on the cover page of this prospectus, less the underwriting discount. If this option is exercised in full, the total offering price to the public will be $[    ] and the total proceeds, before expenses, to us will be $[    ] million.

Discount.  The following table shows the public offering price, underwriting discount and proceeds, before expenses, to us. The information assumes either no exercise or full exercise by the underwriters of their over-allotment option.

     
  Per Share   Total Without Over-Allotment Option   Total With
Over-Allotment
Option
Public offering price   $          $          $       
Underwriting discount   $          $          $       
Proceeds, before expenses, to us   $          $          $       

We have agreed to reimburse the underwriters for certain out-of-pocket expenses of the underwriters payable by us, in an aggregate amount not to exceed US $[    ]. The underwriting agreement, however, provides that in the event this offering is terminated, the underwriters will only be entitled to the reimbursement of out-of-pocket accountable expenses actually incurred in accordance with FINRA Rule 5110(f)(2)(D).

The underwriters propose to offer the shares offered by us to the public at the public offering price per share set forth on the cover of this prospectus. In addition, the underwriters may offer some of the shares to other

84


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

securities dealers at such price less a concession of $[    ] per share. If all of the shares offered by us are not sold at the public offering price per share, the underwriters may change the offering price per share and other selling terms by means of a supplement to this prospectus.

We will pay the reasonable out-of-pocket expenses of the underwriters in connection with this offering.

We estimate that the total expenses of the offering payable by us, excluding underwriting discounts, will be approximately $[    ].

Lock-Up Agreements.  Pursuant to certain “lock-up” agreements, we and our executive officers and directors have agreed, subject to certain exceptions, not to offer, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, contract to sell, or otherwise dispose of or announce the intention to otherwise dispose of, or enter into any swap, hedge or similar agreement or arrangement that transfers, in whole or in part, the economic risk of ownership of, directly or indirectly, engage in any short selling of any common stock or securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for any common stock, whether currently owned or subsequently acquired, without the prior written consent of the underwriter, for a period of three (3) months from the date of effectiveness of the offering.

The lock-up period described in the preceding paragraph will be automatically extended if: (1) during the last 17 days of the restricted period, we issue an earnings release or announce material news or a material event; or (2) prior to the expiration of the lock-up period, we announce that we will release earnings results during the 16-day period beginning on the last day of the lock-up period, in which case the restrictions described in the preceding paragraph will continue to apply until the expiration of the 18-day period beginning on the date of the earnings release, unless the Representative waives this extension in writing.

Electronic Offer, Sale and Distribution of Shares.  A prospectus in electronic format may be made available on the websites maintained by one or more of the underwriters or selling group members, if any, participating in this offering and one or more of the underwriters participating in this offering may distribute prospectuses electronically. The Representative may agree to allocate a number of shares to underwriters and selling group members for sale to their online brokerage account holders. Internet distributions will be allocated by the underwriters and selling group members that will make internet distributions on the same basis as other allocations. Other than the prospectus in electronic format, the information on these websites is not part of, nor incorporated by reference into, this prospectus or the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part, has not been approved or endorsed by us or any underwriter in its capacity as underwriter, and should not be relied upon by investors.

Stabilization.  In connection with this offering, the underwriters may engage in stabilizing transactions, over-allotment transactions, syndicate-covering transactions, penalty bids and purchases to cover positions created by short sales in accordance with Regulation M under the Exchange Act.

Stabilizing transactions permit bids to purchase shares so long as the stabilizing bids do not exceed a specified maximum, and are engaged in for the purpose of preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of the shares while the offering is in progress.
Over-allotment transactions involve sales by the underwriters of shares in excess of the number of shares the underwriters are obligated to purchase. This creates a syndicate short position which may be either a covered short position or a naked short position. In a covered short position, the number of shares over-allotted by the underwriters is not greater than the number of shares that they may purchase in the over-allotment option. In a naked short position, the number of shares involved is greater than the number of shares in the overallotment option. The underwriters may close out any short position by exercising their over-allotment option and/or purchasing shares in the open market.
Syndicate covering transactions involve purchases of shares in the open market after the distribution has been completed in order to cover syndicate short positions. In determining the source of shares to close out the short position, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares available for purchase in the open market as compared with the price at which they may purchase shares through exercise of the over- allotment option. If the underwriters sell more shares than could be covered by exercise of the overallotment option and, therefore, have a naked short position, the

85


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

position can be closed out only by buying shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that after pricing there could be downward pressure on the price of the shares in the open market that could adversely affect investors who purchase in the offering.
Penalty bids permit the Representative to reclaim a selling concession from a syndicate member when the shares originally sold by that syndicate member are purchased in stabilizing or syndicate covering transactions to cover syndicate short positions.

These stabilizing transactions, syndicate covering transactions and penalty bids may have the effect of raising or maintaining the market price of our shares of common stock or preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of our shares of common stock. As a result, the price of our common stock or warrants in the open market may be higher than it would otherwise be in the absence of these transactions. Neither we nor the underwriters make any representation or prediction as to the effect that the transactions described above may have on the price of our common stock. These transactions may be effected on The NASDAQ Capital Market, in the over-the-counter market or otherwise and, if commenced, may be discontinued at any time.

Passive market making.  In connection with this offering, underwriters and selling group members may engage in passive market making transactions in our common stock on The NASDAQ Capital Market in accordance with Rule 103 of Regulation M under the Exchange Act, during a period before the commencement of offers or sales of the shares and extending through the completion of the distribution. A passive market maker must display its bid at a price not in excess of the highest independent bid of that security. However, if all independent bids are lowered below the passive market maker’s bid, then that bid must then be lowered when specified purchase limits are exceeded.

Other Relationships.  Certain of the underwriters and their affiliates have provided, and may in the future provide, various investment banking, commercial banking and other financial services for us and our affiliates for which they have received, and may in the future receive, customary fees. However, except as disclosed in this prospectus, we have no present arrangements with any of the underwriters for any further services.

Offer restrictions outside the United States

Other than in the United States, no action has been taken by us or the underwriters that would permit a public offering of the securities offered by this prospectus in any jurisdiction where action for that purpose is required. The securities offered by this prospectus may not be offered or sold, directly or indirectly, nor may this prospectus or any other offering material or advertisements in connection with the offer and sale of any such securities be distributed or published in any jurisdiction, except under circumstances that will result in compliance with the applicable rules and regulations of that jurisdiction. Persons into whose possession this prospectus comes are advised to inform themselves about and to observe any restrictions relating to the offering and the distribution of this prospectus. This prospectus does not constitute an offer to sell or a solicitation of an offer to buy any securities offered by this prospectus in any jurisdiction in which such an offer or a solicitation is unlawful.

Australia

This prospectus is not a disclosure document under Chapter 6D of the Australian Corporations Act, has not been lodged with the Australian Securities and Investments Commission and does not purport to include the information required of a disclosure document under Chapter 6D of the Australian Corporations Act. Accordingly, (i) the offer of the securities under this prospectus is only made to persons to whom it is lawful to offer the securities without disclosure under Chapter 6D of the Australian Corporations Act under one or more exemptions set out in section 708 of the Australian Corporations Act, (ii) this prospectus is made available in Australia only to those persons as set forth in clause (i) above, and (iii) the offeree must be sent a notice stating in substance that by accepting this offer, the offeree represents that the offeree is such a person as set forth in clause (i) above, and, unless permitted under the Australian Corporations Act, agrees not to sell or offer for sale within Australia any of the securities sold to the offeree within 12 months after its transfer for the offeree under this prospectus.

86


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

China

The information in this document does not constitute a public offer of the securities, whether by way of sale or subscription, in the People’s Republic of China (excluding, for purposes of this paragraph, Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, Macau Special Administrative Region and Taiwan). The securities may not be offered or sold directly or indirectly in the PRC to legal or natural persons other than directly to “qualified domestic institutional investors.”

European Economic Area — Belgium, Germany, Luxembourg and Netherlands

The information in this document has been prepared on the basis that all offers of securities will be made pursuant to an exemption under the Directive 2003/71/EC (“Prospectus Directive”), as implemented in Member States of the European Economic Area (each, a “Relevant Member State”), from the requirement to produce a prospectus for offers of securities.

An offer to the public of securities has not been made, and may not be made, in a Relevant Member State except pursuant to one of the following exemptions under the Prospectus Directive as implemented in that Relevant Member State:

(a) to legal entities that are authorized or regulated to operate in the financial markets or, if not so authorized or regulated, whose corporate purpose is solely to invest in securities;
(b) to any legal entity that has two or more of (i) an average of at least 250 employees during its last fiscal year; (ii) a total balance sheet of more than €43,000,000 (as shown on its last annual unconsolidated or consolidated financial statements) and (iii) an annual net turnover of more than €50,000,000 (as shown on its last annual unconsolidated or consolidated financial statements);
(c) to fewer than 100 natural or legal persons (other than qualified investors within the meaning of Article 2(1)(e) of the Prospectus Directive) subject to obtaining the prior consent of the Company or any underwriter for any such offer; or
(d) in any other circumstances falling within Article 3(2) of the Prospectus Directive, provided that no such offer of securities shall result in a requirement for the publication by the Company of a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive.

France

This document is not being distributed in the context of a public offering of financial securities (offre au public de titres financiers) in France within the meaning of Article L.411-1 of the French Monetary and Financial Code (Code monétaire et financier) and Articles 211-1 et seq. of the General Regulation of the French Autorité des marchés financiers (“AMF”). The securities have not been offered or sold and will not be offered or sold, directly or indirectly, to the public in France.

This document and any other offering material relating to the securities have not been, and will not be, submitted to the AMF for approval in France and, accordingly, may not be distributed or caused to distributed, directly or indirectly, to the public in France.

Such offers, sales and distributions have been and shall only be made in France to (i) qualified investors (investisseurs qualifiés) acting for their own account, as defined in and in accordance with Articles L.411-2-II-2° and D.411-1 to D.411-3, D.744-1, D.754-1 and D.764-1 of the French Monetary and Financial Code and any implementing regulation and/or (ii) a restricted number of non-qualified investors (cercle restreint d’investisseurs) acting for their own account, as defined in and in accordance with Articles L.411-2-II-2° and D.411-4, D.744-1, D.754-1 and D.764-1 of the French Monetary and Financial Code and any implementing regulation.

Pursuant to Article 211-3 of the General Regulation of the AMF, investors in France are informed that the securities cannot be distributed (directly or indirectly) to the public by the investors otherwise than in accordance with Articles L.411-1, L.411-2, L.412-1 and L.621-8 to L.621-8-3 of the French Monetary and Financial Code.

87


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Ireland

The information in this document does not constitute a prospectus under any Irish laws or regulations and this document has not been filed with or approved by any Irish regulatory authority as the information has not been prepared in the context of a public offering of securities in Ireland within the meaning of the Irish Prospectus (Directive 2003/71/EC) Regulations 2005 (the “Prospectus Regulations”). The securities have not been offered or sold, and will not be offered, sold or delivered directly or indirectly in Ireland by way of a public offering, except to (i) qualified investors as defined in Regulation 2(l) of the Prospectus Regulations and (ii) fewer than 100 natural or legal persons who are not qualified investors.

Israel

The securities offered by this prospectus have not been approved or disapproved by the Israeli Securities Authority, or the ISA, nor have such securities been registered for sale in Israel. The shares may not be offered or sold, directly or indirectly, to the public in Israel, absent the publication of a prospectus. The ISA has not issued permits, approvals or licenses in connection with the offering or publishing the prospectus; nor has it authenticated the details included herein, confirmed their reliability or completeness, or rendered an opinion as to the quality of the securities being offered. Any resale in Israel, directly or indirectly, to the public of the securities offered by this prospectus is subject to restrictions on transferability and must be effected only in compliance with the Israeli securities laws and regulations.

Italy

The offering of the securities in the Republic of Italy has not been authorized by the Italian Securities and Exchange Commission (Commissione Nazionale per le Società e la Borsa, “CONSOB”, pursuant to the Italian securities legislation and, accordingly, no offering material relating to the securities may be distributed in Italy and such securities may not be offered or sold in Italy in a public offer within the meaning of Article 1.1(t) of Legislative Decree No. 58 of 24 February 1998 (“Decree No. 58”), other than:

to Italian qualified investors, as defined in Article 100 of Decree no. 58 by reference to Article 34-ter of CONSOB Regulation no. 11971 of 14 May 1999 (“Regulation no. 1197l”) as amended (“Qualified Investors”); and
in other circumstances that are exempt from the rules on public offer pursuant to Article 100 of Decree No. 58 and Article 34-ter of Regulation No. 11971 as amended.

Any offer, sale or delivery of the securities or distribution of any offer document relating to the securities in Italy (excluding placements where a Qualified Investor solicits an offer from the issuer) under the paragraphs above must be:

made by investment firms, banks or financial intermediaries permitted to conduct such activities in Italy in accordance with Legislative Decree No. 385 of 1 September 1993 (as amended), Decree No. 58, CONSOB Regulation No. 16190 of 29 October 2007 and any other applicable laws; and
in compliance with all relevant Italian securities, tax and exchange controls and any other applicable laws.

Any subsequent distribution of the securities in Italy must be made in compliance with the public offer and prospectus requirement rules provided under Decree No. 58 and the Regulation No. 11971 as amended, unless an exception from those rules applies. Failure to comply with such rules may result in the sale of such securities being declared null and void and in the liability of the entity transferring the securities for any damages suffered by the investors.

Japan

The securities have not been and will not be registered under Article 4, paragraph 1 of the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law of Japan (Law No. 25 of 1948), as amended (the “FIEL”) pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements applicable to a private placement of securities to Qualified Institutional Investors (as defined in and in accordance with Article 2, paragraph 3 of the FIEL and the regulations promulgated thereunder). Accordingly, the securities may not be offered or sold, directly or indirectly, in Japan or to, or for the benefit of, any resident of Japan other than Qualified Institutional

88


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Investors. Any Qualified Institutional Investor who acquires securities may not resell them to any person in Japan that is not a Qualified Institutional Investor, and acquisition by any such person of securities is conditional upon the execution of an agreement to that effect.

Portugal

This document is not being distributed in the context of a public offer of financial securities (oferta pública de valores mobiliários) in Portugal, within the meaning of Article 109 of the Portuguese Securities Code (Código dos Valores Mobiliários). The securities have not been offered or sold and will not be offered or sold, directly or indirectly, to the public in Portugal. This document and any other offering material relating to the securities have not been, and will not be, submitted to the Portuguese Securities Market Commission (Comissã do Mercado de Valores Mobiliários) for approval in Portugal and, accordingly, may not be distributed or caused to distributed, directly or indirectly, to the public in Portugal, other than under circumstances that are deemed not to qualify as a public offer under the Portuguese Securities Code. Such offers, sales and distributions of securities in Portugal are limited to persons who are “qualified investors” (as defined in the Portuguese Securities Code). Only such investors may receive this document and they may not distribute it or the information contained in it to any other person.

Sweden

This document has not been, and will not be, registered with or approved by Finansinspektionen (the Swedish Financial Supervisory Authority). Accordingly, this document may not be made available, nor may the securities be offered for sale in Sweden, other than under circumstances that are deemed not to require a prospectus under the Swedish Financial Instruments Trading Act (1991:980) (Sw. lag (1991:980) om handel med finansiella instrument). Any offering of securities in Sweden is limited to persons who are “qualified investors” (as defined in the Financial Instruments Trading Act). Only such investors may receive this document and they may not distribute it or the information contained in it to any other person.

Switzerland

The securities may not be publicly offered in Switzerland and will not be listed on the SIX Swiss Exchange (“SIX”) or on any other stock exchange or regulated trading facility in Switzerland. This document has been prepared without regard to the disclosure standards for issuance prospectuses under art. 652a or art. 1156 of the Swiss Code of Obligations or the disclosure standards for listing prospectuses under art. 27 ff. of the SIX Listing Rules or the listing rules of any other stock exchange or regulated trading facility in Switzerland. Neither this document nor any other offering material relating to the securities may be publicly distributed or otherwise made publicly available in Switzerland.

Neither this document nor any other offering material relating to the securities have been or will be filed with or approved by any Swiss regulatory authority. In particular, this document will not be filed with, and the offer of securities will not be supervised by, the Swiss Financial Market Supervisory Authority.

This document is personal to the recipient only and not for general circulation in Switzerland.

United Arab Emirates

Neither this document nor the securities have been approved, disapproved or passed on in any way by the Central Bank of the United Arab Emirates or any other governmental authority in the United Arab Emirates, nor has the Company received authorization or licensing from the Central Bank of the United Arab Emirates or any other governmental authority in the United Arab Emirates to market or sell the securities within the United Arab Emirates. This document does not constitute and may not be used for the purpose of an offer or invitation. No services relating to the securities, including the receipt of applications and/or the allotment or redemption of such shares, may be rendered within the United Arab Emirates by the Company.

No offer or invitation to subscribe for securities is valid or permitted in the Dubai International Financial Centre.

United Kingdom

Neither the information in this document nor any other document relating to the offer has been delivered for approval to the Financial Services Authority in the United Kingdom and no prospectus (within the meaning of

89


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

section 85 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, as amended (“FSMA”)) has been published or is intended to be published in respect of the securities. This document is issued on a confidential basis to “qualified investors” (within the meaning of section 86(7) of FSMA) in the United Kingdom, and the securities may not be offered or sold in the United Kingdom by means of this document, any accompanying letter or any other document, except in circumstances which do not require the publication of a prospectus pursuant to section 86(1) FSMA.

This document should not be distributed, published or reproduced, in whole or in part, nor may its contents be disclosed by recipients to any other person in the United Kingdom.

Any invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of section 21 of FSMA) received in connection with the issue or sale of the securities has only been communicated or caused to be communicated and will only be communicated or caused to be communicated in the United Kingdom in circumstances in which section 21(1) of FSMA does not apply.

In the United Kingdom, this document is being distributed only to, and is directed at, persons (i) who have professional experience in matters relating to investments falling within Article 19(5) (investment professionals) of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Financial Promotions) Order 2005 (“FPO”), (ii) who fall within the categories of persons referred to in Article 49(2)(a) to (d) (high net worth companies, unincorporated associations, etc.) of the FPO or (iii) to whom it may otherwise be lawfully communicated (together “relevant persons”). The investments to which this document relates are available only to, and any invitation, offer or agreement to purchase will be engaged in only with, relevant persons. Any person who is not a relevant person should not act or rely on this document or any of its contents.

LEGAL MATTERS

Robinson Brog Leinwand Greene Genovese & Gluck P.C. will render a legal opinion as to the validity of the shares of the common stock to be registered hereby. The underwriters are being represented by Shearman & Sterling LLP, New York, New York.

EXPERTS

Our financial statements as of and for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2013 included in this prospectus have been audited by Friedman, LLP, independent certified public accountants, to the extent and for the periods set forth in their report appearing elsewhere herein, and are included in reliance on such report given upon the authority of said firm as experts in auditing and accounting.

WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

We file annual, quarterly and current reports, proxy statements and other information with the SEC. We have also filed with the SEC under the Securities Act a registration statement on Form S-1 with respect to the common stock offered by this prospectus. This prospectus, which constitutes part of the registration statement, does not contain all the information set forth in the registration statement or the exhibits and schedules which are part of the registration statement, portions of which are omitted as permitted by the rules and regulations of the SEC. Statements made in this prospectus regarding the contents of any contract or other document are summaries of the material terms of the contract or document. With respect to each contract or document filed as an exhibit to the registration statement, reference is made to the corresponding exhibit. For further information pertaining to us and the common stock offered by this prospectus, reference is made to the registration statement, including the exhibits and schedules thereto, copies of which may be inspected without charge at the Public Reference Room of the SEC at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549 on official business days during the hours of 10 a.m. to 3 p.m. Copies of all or any portion of the registration statement may be obtained from the SEC at prescribed rates. Information on the Public Reference Room may be obtained by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. In addition, the SEC maintains an Internet site that contains reports, proxy and information statements and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC. The web site can be accessed at http://www.sec.gov. The internet address of xG is www.xgtechnology.com. Information contained on our website is not a part of, and is not incorporated into, this prospectus, and the inclusion of our website address in this prospectus is an inactive textual reference only.

90


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
December 31, 2013 and December 31, 2012

F-1


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Board of Directors and
Stockholders of xG Technology, Inc.

We have audited the accompanying balance sheets of xG Technology, Inc. as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the related statements of income, stockholders’ equity (deficit), and cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012. xG Technology, Inc.’s management is responsible for these financial statements. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. The company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. Our audit included consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of xG Technology, Inc. as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

The accompanying financial statements have been prepared assuming that the Company will continue as a going concern. As discussed in Note 2 to the financial statements, the Company has recurring losses. These conditions raise substantial doubt about its ability to continue as a going concern. Management’s plans in regard to these matters are also described in Note 2. The financial statements do not include and adjustments relating to the recoverability and classification of assets carrying amounts or the amount and classification of liabilities that might result should the Company be unable to continue as a going concern.

/s/ FRIEDMAN LLP
East Hanover, New Jersey
March 6, 2014

F-2


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
BALANCE SHEETS
(IN THOUSANDS EXCEPT SHARE DATA)

   
  December 31,
     2013   2012
ASSETS
                 
Current assets
                 
Cash   $ 5,517     $ 271  
Inventory     2,916        
Accounts Receivable, net of allowance of $16 ($470 from related party, net of allowance of $10)     788        
Prepaid expenses and other current assets     49       16  
Due from related party     1,350        
Total current assets     10,620       287  
Property and equipment, net     806       1,725  
Intangible assets, net     18,196       17,608  
Total assets   $ 29,622     $ 19,620  
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY (DEFICIT)
                 
Current liabilities
                 
Accounts payable   $ 1,841     $ 655  
Accrued expenses     772       754  
Accrued bonuses     298       2,633  
Accrued interest     42       42  
Accrued interest to related parties           1,127  
Due to related party     1,526       1,098  
Deferred revenue – related party     480        
Obligation under capital lease     129        
Convertible notes payable to related party           17,198  
Total current liabilities     5,088       23,507  
Long-term obligation under capital lease     118        
Convertible notes payable     2,000       2,000  
Total liabilities     7,206       25,507  
Commitments
                 
Stockholders’ equity (deficit)
                 
Series A Convertible Preferred Stock – $0.01 par value per share:
                 
10,000,000 and 25,000,000 shares authorized, none issued or outstanding as of December 31, 2013 and 2012            
Common stock, – $0.00001 par value, 300,000,000 and 250,000,000 shares authorized, 18,682,310 and 6,041,946 shares issued as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively     —*       —*  
Additional paid in capital     174,000       118,247  
Accumulated deficit     (151,562 )      (124,112 ) 
Treasury stock, at cost – 2,284 shares as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively     (22 )      (22 ) 
Total stockholder’s equity (deficit)     22,416       (5,887 ) 
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity   $ 29,622     $ 19,620  

* Less than $1

 
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements.

F-3


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)

   
  For the Year Ended
December 31,
     2013   2012
Revenue   $ 406     $  
Cost of revenue and operating expenses
                 
Cost of components and personnel     102        
General and administrative expenses     5,501       5,543  
Development     5,468       4,806  
Stock based compensation     796       554  
Amortization and depreciation     2,370       2,063  
Total cost of revenue and operating expenses     14,237       12,966  
Loss from operations     (13,831 )      (12,966 ) 
Other income (expense)
                 
Other expense     (10,068 )       
Inducement expense     (391 )       
Interest expense, net     (2,227 )      (535 ) 
Impairment     (933 )      (286 ) 
Total other income (expense)     (13,619 )      (821 ) 
Loss before income tax provision     (27,450 )      (13,787 ) 
Income tax provision            
Net loss   $ (27,450 )    $ (13,787 ) 
Basic and diluted net loss per share     (2.86 )      (2.29 ) 
Weighted average number of shares outstanding basic and diluted     9,598       6,031  

 
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements.

F-4


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)

           
  Common Stock   Additional Paid In Capital   Treasury Stock   Accumulated Deficit   Total
     Shares   Amount
Balance, January 1, 2012     6,016,455     $ —*     $ 117,012     $ (10 )    $ (110,325 )    $ 6,677  
Net loss                             (13,787 )      (13,787 ) 
Stock based compensation                 410                   410  
Compensation of consultant granted in stock     3,217       —*       97                   97  
Issuance of common shares     11,428       —*       400                   400  
Exercise of options     660       —*       5                   5  
Issuance of warrants                 143                   143  
Purchase of treasury stock                       (12 )            (12 ) 
Issuance of stock in exchange for payment of interest on convertible debt     10,186       —*       180                   180  
Balance, December 31, 2012     6,041,946     $ —*     $ 118,247     $ (22 )    $ (124,112 )    $ (5,887 ) 

* Less than $1

 
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements.

F-5


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
(IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT SHARE AND PER SHARE DATA)

           
  Common Stock   Additional Paid In Capital   Treasury Stock   Accumulated Deficit   Total
     Shares   Amount
Balance, January 1, 2013     6,041,946     $ —*     $ 118,247     $ (22 )    $ (124,112 )    $ (5,887 ) 
Net loss                             (27,450 )      (27,450 ) 
Stock based compensation                 796                   796  
Compensation granted in stock     15,242       —*       94                   94  
Issuance of stock in exchange for payment of interest on convertible debt     41,672       —*       180                   180  
Conversion of 2011 Convertible Note Payable Principal Balance     1,127,820       —*       15,000                   15,000  
Issuance of stock for inducement of 2011 Convertible note payable     159,330       —*                          
Issuance of stock for conversion of Bridge Loan and extinguishment     2,187,529       —*       11,480                   11,480  
Issuance of Warrants – conversion of bridge loan                 392                   392  
Issuance of warrants for the Bridge Loan and extinguishment                 401                   401  
Issuance of shares and warrants – IPO     1,337,792       —*       6,751                   6,751  
Issuance of shares and warrants – IPO over-allotment     200,668       —*       1,027                   1,027  
Issuance of – shares, warrants, and modification of options for one-time agreement with MBTH     1,599,453       —*       10,067                   10,067  
Issuance of shares and warrants – secondary offering     5,715,000       —*       9,147                   9,147  
Issuance of stock – secondary offering exercise of over-allotment     255,000       —*       415                   415  
Issuance of stock from exercise of warrants     858       —*       3                   3  
Balance, December 31, 2013     18,682,310     $ —*     $ 174,000     $ (22 )    $ (151,562 )    $ 22,416  

* Less than $1

 
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements.

F-6


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
(IN THOUSANDS)

   
  Year Ended December 31,
     2013   2012
Cash flows from operating activities
                 
Net loss   $ (27,450 )    $ (13,787 ) 
Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash used in operating activities
                 
Stock based compensation     796       554  
Share-based consulting and other services     94       100  
Allowance for doubtful accounts     16        
Depreciation and amortization     2,370       2,063  
Impairment     933       286  
Accretion of financing instruments     176        
Amounts paid by affiliate on behalf of xG           1,500  
Inducement expense     391        
Other expense     10,067        
Non-cash interest expense     601        
Reversal of 2011 and 2012 accrued bonus expense     (2,335 )       
Changes in assets and liabilities
                 
Accounts receivable     (804 )       
Inventory     (2,621 )       
Prepaid expenses and other current assets     293       28  
Accounts payable     1,186       (32 ) 
Accrued expenses     21       191  
Accrued bonuses           1,258  
Accrued interest and fees     1,300       1,180  
Deferred revenue – related party     480        
Due to related party     91       1,098  
Net cash used in operating activities     (14,395 )      (5,561 ) 
Cash flows from investing activities
                 
Capital expenditures for property and equipment     (294 )      (515 ) 
Capitalization of intangible assets     (2,602 )      (4,491 ) 
Net cash used in investing activities     (2,896 )      (5,006 ) 
Cash flows from financing activities
                 
Repayment of capital lease     (123 )       
Proceeds from convertible notes payable     450       10,315  
Proceeds from convertible bridge loan payable ($2,727 to related party)     4,994        
Repayment of convertible bridge loan payable     (125 )       
Proceeds from issuance of common stock     17,340       400  
Purchase of treasury stock           (12 ) 
Proceeds from exercise of options           2  
Proceeds from issuance of warrants     1        
Net cash provided by financing activities     22,537       10,705  
Net increase in cash     5,246       138  
Cash, beginning of year     271       133  
Cash, end of year   $ 5,517     $ 271  

 
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements.

F-7


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS – (continued)
(IN THOUSANDS)

   
  Year Ended December 31,
     2013   2012
Supplemental cash flow disclosures of investing and financing activities
                 
Conversion of notes payable   $ 15,000     $  
Conversion of convertible bridge loan payable including interest and fees     9,023        
Interest and fees refinanced under the bridge loan     5,408        
Due to related party refinanced under the bridge loan     1,393        
Related party amount refinanced under the bridge loan     1,013        
Capital lease obligation for property and equipment     370        
Reclass of fixed asset to inventory     293        
Stock issued as payment for interest on convertible notes     180       180  

 
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these statements.

F-8


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1 — NATURE OF OPERATIONS

Description of Business

xG Technology, Inc. (the “Company”) is a Delaware corporation that has developed a broad portfolio of innovative intellectual property that we believe will enhance wireless communications. Our intellectual property is embedded in proprietary software algorithms designed to offer cognitive interference mitigation and spectrum access solutions to organizations in a wide variety of industries, including national defense and rural broadband, which represent the primary vertical markets that the Company is initially targeting.

2 — GOING CONCERN

The financial statements have been prepared in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles which contemplate continuation of the Company as a going concern. As of December 31, 2013, the Company has an accumulated deficit of $151,562,000 and a net loss of $27.5 million for the year then ended. This and other factors raise substantial doubt about the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern.

The ability of the Company to continue as a going concern is dependent upon its ability to raise additional capital, obtain other means of financing, and to fulfill its existing backlog. As of March 6, 2014, the Company has a total backlog of $34.6 million. The ability to recognize revenue and ultimately cash receipts, on the existing backlog is contingent upon, but not limited to, acceptable performance of the delivered equipment and services. The Company began fulfilling orders associated with its back log during the fourth quarter of 2013. The financial statements do not include any adjustments relating to the recoverability and classification of asset carrying amounts or the amount and classification of liabilities that might result should the Company be unable to continue as a going concern.

3 — SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

Use of Estimates

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, and disclosure of contingent liabilities at the date of the financial statements, and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

Cash and Cash Equivalents

The Company considers all highly liquid investments with maturities of three months or less at the time of purchase to be cash equivalents. At times, the Company’s cash balances may exceed the current insured amounts under the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.

Concentrations of Credit Risk for Cash

The Company does not have any off-balance-sheet concentrations of credit risk. The Company expects cash to be the single asset most likely to subject the Company to concentration of credit risk. The Company’s policy is to maintain its cash with high credit quality financial institutions to limit its risk of loss exposure.

During the year, the Company had cash balances in excess of the federally insured limits of $250,000. The funds are on deposit with Wells Fargo Bank, N.A. Consequently, the Company does not believe that there is a significant risk having these balances in one financial institution. The Company has not experienced any losses in its bank accounts through December 31, 2013.

Inventory

Inventories, consisting principally of raw materials and finished goods, are carried at the lower of cost or market. Cost is determined using the first-in, first-out (FIFO) method. Raw materials consist of purchased parts, components and work in process. The Company evaluates inventory balances and adjusts inventory to the lower of cost or market based upon anticipated usage of the inventory and the potential for obsolescence.

F-9


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

3 — SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES  – (continued)

Intangible Assets

Capitalized software costs incurred in the research, design and development of software for sale to others as a separate product or embedded in a product and sold as part of the product as a whole are charged to expense until technological feasibility is established and amortized on a straight-line basis over five years, beginning when the products are offered for sale or the enhancements are integrated into the products. Management is required to use its judgment in determining whether capitalized software costs meet the criteria for immediate expense or capitalization, in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (“GAAP”). The unamortized capitalized costs of a computer software product are compared to the net realizable value of that product and any excess is written off.

The Company’s proprietary software solutions operate in a fast changing industry that may generate unknown methods of detecting and monitoring disturbances that could render our technology inferior, resulting in the Company’s results of operations being materially adversely affected. The Company does, however, closely monitor trends and changes in technologies and customer demand that could adversely impact its competitiveness and overall success. It is reasonably possible that those estimates of anticipated future gross revenues, the remaining estimated economic life of the product, or both will be reduced significantly in the near term due to competitive pressures. As a result, the carrying amount of the capitalized software costs for the Company’s products may be reduced materially in the near term.

Costs incurred for product enhancements are charged to expense as research and development until the technological feasibility of the enhancement has been established. These enhancements are amortized on a straight line basis over the useful life of the product enhancement which is currently estimated to be five years beginning when the enhancements are integrated into the products that are offered for sale.

The Company’s software is inherently complex and may contain defects and errors that are only detectable when the products are in use. Such defects or errors could have a serious impact on our end customers, which could damage our reputation, harm our customer relationships and expose us to liability. Defects in the Company’s software could adversely affect our ability and that of our customers to ship products on a timely basis as well as customer or licensee demand for our products. Any such delays or declines in demand could reduce the Company’s revenues and harm our ability to achieve or sustain desired levels of profitability. We and our customers may also experience component or software failures or defects that could require significant product recalls, rework and/or repairs that are not covered by warranty reserves. Intellectual property is embedded in proprietary software algorithms that offer cognitive spectrum access and interference mitigation solutions.

Patents and licenses are measured initially at purchase cost and are amortized on a straight line basis over their useful lives which range between 18.5 to 20 years.

Property, Plant and Equipment

Property, plant and equipment are presented at cost at the date of acquisition. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over estimated useful asset lives, which range from 3 to 7 years commencing the month following the purchase.

Impairment of Long-Lived Assets

Long lived assets including certain intangible assets with finite lives are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. Recoverability of assets to be held and used is measured by a comparison of the carrying amount of an asset to the undiscounted future net cash flows expected to be generated by that asset. If the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its estimated future undiscounted cash flows, an impairment charge is recognized by the amount by which the carrying amount of the asset exceeds the fair value of the asset. Impairment of intangible assets

F-10


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

3 — SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES  – (continued)

amounted to $37,000 and $18,000 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Impairment of property and equipment amounted to $896,000 and $268,000 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

In the event that management determines that a receivable becomes uncollectible, or events or circumstances change, which result in a temporary cessation of payments from the customer, we will make our best estimate of probable or potential losses in our accounts receivable balance using he allowance method for each quarterly period. Management will periodically review the receivables at the end of each quarterly reporting period and the appropriate accrual will be made based on current available evidence and historical experience. Allowance for doubtful accounts were $16,000 and $0 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Revenue Recognition

The Company recognizes revenues when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, services have been rendered, the price is fixed and determinable, and collectability is reasonably assured. Revenues from management and consulting, time-and-materials service contracts, maintenance agreements and other services are recognized as the services are provided or at the time the goods are shipped and title as passed.

Development Expenses

Development expenses consist primarily of salaries and related costs for technical and programming personnel, are expensed as incurred and were $5,468,000 and $4,806,000 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Income Taxes

The Company accounts for income taxes using the assets and liability method. Accordingly, deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in the tax rate is recognized in income or expense in the period that the change is effective. Tax benefits are recognized when it is probable that the deduction will be sustained. A valuation allowance is established when it is more likely than not that all or a portion of a deferred tax asset will not be realized.

The Company files a U.S. federal and state income tax return. The Company recognizes liabilities for uncertain tax positions based on the two-step process prescribed by GAAP. The first step is to evaluate the tax position for recognition by determining if the weight of available evidence indicates that it is more likely than not that the position will be sustained on audit, including resolution of related appeals or litigation processes, if any. The second step requires the Company to estimate and measure the tax benefit as the largest amount that is more than 50% likely of being realized upon ultimate settlement. The Company reevaluates these uncertain tax positions on a quarterly basis. This evaluation is based on factors including, but not limited to, changes in facts or circumstances, changes in tax law, effectively settled issues under audit, and new audit activity. Such a change in recognition or measurement would result in the recognition of a tax benefit or an additional charge to the tax provision in the period. The Company recognizes interest and penalties as incurred in finance income (expense), net in the Statements of Operations. There were no liabilities recorded for uncertain tax positions at December 31, 2013 and 2012.

F-11


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

3 — SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES  – (continued)

Stock Based Compensation

The Company accounts for stock-based awards to employees in accordance with applicable accounting principles, which requires compensation expense related to share-based transactions, including employee stock options, to be measured and recognized in the financial statements based on a determination of the fair value of the stock options.

The grant date fair value is determined using the Black-Scholes-Merton (“Black-Scholes”) pricing model. For all employee stock options, the Company recognizes expense over the employee’s requisite service period (generally the vesting period of the equity grant). The Company’s option pricing model requires the input of highly subjective assumptions, including the expected stock price volatility, expected term, and forfeiture rate. Any changes in these highly subjective assumptions significantly impact stock-based compensation expense.

Options awarded to purchase shares of common stock issued to non-employees in exchange for services are accounted for as variable awards in accordance with applicable accounting principles. Such options are valued using the Black-Scholes option pricing model.

Treasury Stock

Shares of common stock repurchased are recorded at cost as treasury stock. When shares are reissued, the cost method is used for determining cost. In accordance with GAAP, the excess of the acquisition cost over the reissuance price of the treasury stock, if any, is recorded to additional paid-in capital, limited to the amount previously credited to additional paid-in capital, if any. Any excess is charged to accumulated deficit.

Earnings Per Share

Basic earnings per common share amounts are based on weighted average number of common shares outstanding. Diluted earnings per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of common shares outstanding, plus the incremental shares that would have been outstanding upon the assumed exercise of all potentially dilutive stock options, warrants and convertible stock, subject to anti-dilution limitations. All such potentially dilutive instruments were anti-dilutive as of December 31, 2013 and 2012. At December 31, 2013 and 2012 approximately 5.29 million and 2.05 million shares underlying the convertible debentures, options and warrants were anti-dilutive.

Warranty Reserve

The Company established a warranty reserve policy effective for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2013. Although the Company tests its product in accordance with its quality programs and processes, its warranty obligation is affected by product failure rates and service delivery costs incurred in correcting a product failure. Should actual product failure rates or service costs differ from the Company’s estimates, which are based on limited historical data, where applicable, revisions to the estimated warranty liability would be required. The warranty reserve for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2013 and 2012 was $8,000 and $0, respectively.

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

Generally accepted accounting principles require disclosing the fair value of financial instruments to the extent practicable for financial instruments which are recognized or unrecognized in the balance sheet. The fair value of the financial instruments disclosed herein is not necessarily representative of the amount that could be realized or settled, nor does the fair value amount consider the tax consequences of realization or settlement.

F-12


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

3 — SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES  – (continued)

In assessing the fair value of financial instruments, the Company uses a variety of methods and assumptions, which are based on estimates of market conditions and risks existing at the time. For certain instruments, including cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable, and accrued expenses, it was estimated that the carrying amount approximated fair value because of the short maturities of these instruments. All debt is based on current rates at which the Company could borrow funds with similar remaining maturities and approximates fair value.

GAAP establishes a hierarchy for inputs used in measuring fair value that maximizes the use of observable inputs and minimizes the use on unobservable inputs by requiring that the most observable inputs be used when available. Observable inputs are inputs that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability developed based on market data obtained from sources independent of the Company. Unobservable inputs are inputs that reflect the Company’s assumptions about the assumptions market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability developed based on the best information available in the circumstances. The hierarchy is described below:

Level 1: Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets that are accessible at the measurement date for assets or liabilities. The fair value hierarchy gives the highest priority to Level 1 inputs.
Level 2: Observable prices that are based on inputs not quoted on active markets, but corroborated by market data.
Level 3: Unobservable inputs are used when little or no market data is available. The fair value hierarchy gives the lowest priority to Level 3 inputs.

The following table presents the Company’s assets and liabilities that are measured at fair value on a recurring basis at December 31, 2013, consistent with the fair value hierarchy provisions:

       
  Quoted Prices
in Active Markets for Identical
Assets/Liabilities
(Level 1)
  Significant Other Observable Inputs (Level 2)   Significant Unobservable Inputs (Level 3)   Carrying Amount
Assets:
                                   
Cash   $ 5,517,000     $     $     $ 5,517,000  
Liabilities:
                                   
Convertible notes payable   $     $ 90,000     $     $ 2,000,000  

The following table presents the Company’s assets and liabilities that are measured at fair value on a recurring basis at December 31, 2012, consistent with the fair value hierarchy provisions:

       
  Quoted Prices
in Active Markets for Identical Assets/Liabilities
(Level 1)
  Significant Other Observable Inputs (Level 2)   Significant Unobservable Inputs (Level 3)   Carrying Amount
Assets:
                                   
Cash   $ 271,000     $     $     $ 271,000  
Liabilities:
                                   
Convertible notes payable   $     $ 10,595,533     $     $ 19,198,000  

F-13


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

3 — SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES  – (continued)

Recently Issued Accounting Principles

We are an “emerging growth company” as defined in the Jumpstart Our Business Startups Act of 2012, or JOBS Act. We will remain an emerging growth company for up to five years, or until the earliest of (i) the last day of the first fiscal year in which our annual gross revenue exceed $1 billion, (ii) the date that we become a “large accelerated filer” as defined in Rule 12b-2 under the Exchange Act, which would occur if the market value of our common stock that is held by non-affiliates exceeds $700 million as of the last business day of our most recently completed second fiscal quarter or (iii) the date on which we have issued more than $1 billion in non-convertible debt during the preceding three-year period. Pursuant to Section 107 of the JOBS Act, we have elected to utilize the extended transition period provided in Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act for complying with new or revised accounting standards.

4 — INVENTORY

Inventories included in the accompanying balance sheet are stated at the lower of cost or market as summarized below:

   
  December 31,
2013
  December 31,
2012
Raw materials consisting of purchased parts, components and work in process   $ 2,461,000     $  
Finished goods     455,000        
Total Inventory   $ 2,916,000     $  

Based upon the Company’s analysis of the lower of cost or market, there was no reserve for inventory recorded as of December 31, 2013.

5 — ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE

Accounts receivable consist of the following:

   
  December 31,
2013
  December 31,
2012
Accounts receivable   $ 324,000     $  
Accounts receivable – related party     480,000        
Net allowance for doubtful accounts     (16,000 )       
Net accounts receivable   $ 788,000     $  

F-14


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

6 — PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT

Property and equipment consist of the following:

     
  Useful Life (years)   December 31,
     2013   2012
Cost:                           
Furniture and equipment     3 – 7 years     $ 2,633,000     $ 1,970,000  
Hardware     4 – 5 years             2,486,000  
             2,633,000       4,456,000  
Accumulated depreciation:           (1,827,000 )      (2,731,000 ) 
Property and equipment, net         $ 806,000     $ 1,725,000  

Depreciation of property and equipment amounted to $393,000 and $662,000 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Impairment of property and equipment amounted to $896,000 and $268,000 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. We also reclassified $293,000 of hardware supplies into inventory in 2013. The impairment charge of $896,000 in 2013 was related to hardware with a cost of $2,193,000 and an accumulated depreciation of $1,297,000.

7 — INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Intangible assets consist of the following:

         
  Software Development Costs   Patents & Licenses
     Cost   A.A.   Cost   A.A.   Total
Balance as of December 31, 2011   $ 7,975,000     $ (479,000 )    $ 12,051,000     $ (5,010,000 )    $ 14,537,000  
Additions     4,251,000             239,000             4,490,000  
Impairments                 (18,000 )            (18,000 ) 
Amortization           (782,000 )            (619,000 )      (1,401,000 ) 
Balance as of December 31, 2012   $ 12,226,000     $ (1,261,000 )    $ 12,272,000     $ (5,629,000 )    $ 17,608,000  
Additions     2,562,000             39,000             2,601,000  
Impairments                 (36,000 )            (36,000 ) 
Amortization           (1,313,000 )            (664,000 )      (1,977,000 ) 
Balance as of December 31, 2013   $ 14,788,000     $ (2,574,000 )    $ 12,275,000     $ (6,293,000 )    $ 18,196,000  

Amortization of intangible assets amounted to $1,977,000 and $1,401,000 for 2013 and 2012, respectively. The total cost basis of intangible assets at December 31, 2013 was $27.1 million which consists of $26.8 million of costs that are subject to amortization at December 31, 2013 and $0.3 million of assets that are not subject to amortization at December 31, 2013.

Software Development Costs:

At December 31, 2013 the Company has capitalized a total of $14.8 million of software development costs. On September 26, 2013, the Company received the last remaining certification from the FCC needed for the xMax cognitive radio products. The xMax cognitive radio products include the xAP, xMod, xVM and xMSC. Beginning on September 30, 2013, Management determined that the xMax cognitive radio products were available for sale and these products will be amortized on a straight line basis over an estimated life of five years. The Company recognized amortization of software development costs available for sale of $1.3 million and $0.8 million in 2013 and 2012. Since October 1, 2013, the Company has been focusing on the enhancement of the xMax cognitive radio products. These costs are not being amortized considering that the enhancement is yet incorporated in products and available for sale.

F-15


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

7 — INTANGIBLE ASSETS  – (continued)

Patents & Licenses:

At December 31, 2013 the Company has capitalized a total of $12.3 million of patents & licenses. Included in the capitalized costs is $12.2 million of costs associated with patents and licenses that have been filed. Also included in the capitalized costs is $0.1 million of costs associated with provisional patents and pending applications which have not yet been filed.

The Company amortizes patents and licenses that have been filed over their useful lives which range between 18.5 to 20 years. The costs of provisional patents and pending applications is not amortized until the patent is filed and is reviewed each reporting period to determine if it is likely that the patent will be successfully filed. The Company recognized $0.7 million of amortization expense related to patents and licenses in each of the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.

Estimated amortization expense for the succeeding five years is as follows:

 
2014   $ 3,590,000  
2015     3,590,000  
2016     3,127,000  
2017     2,809,000  
2018 and thereafter     4,840,000  
     $ 17,956,000  

8 — OBLIGATION UNDER CAPITAL LEASE

The future minimum payments for capital leases as at December 31, 2013 are as follows:

 
2014   $ 129,000  
2015     128,000  
Total minimum lease payments     257,000  
Less amount representing interest     10,000  
Present value of the net minimum lease payments     247,000  
Less obligations under capital lease maturing within one year     129,000  
Long-term portion of obligations under capital lease   $ 118,000  

During 2013, the Company financed certain capital expenditures totaling $257,000 through the issuance of capital leases. The interest rate for this transaction was 4%.

9 — CONVERTIBLE NOTES PAYABLE

On May 19, 2011, the Company entered into a convertible promissory note (the “May 2011 Convertible Note”) whereby the Company borrowed principal advances in the amount of up to $15 million with MBTH (subject to increase by mutual agreement). The loan was payable on final maturity, May 19, 2016, or earlier demand, and was convertible, at MBTH’s option, into shares of the Company at a price of $26.25 per share. Interest was payable semi-annually in cash or shares, at the Company’s option, at the rate of 8% per year. Additionally, a facility fee of 2% was payable by the Company at maturity. The loan facility was secured against substantially all of the assets of the Company. As of December 31, 2012, the Company had drawn down $17.2 million of principal balance under the May 2011 Convertible Note and accrued interest and fees at December 31, 2012 was $1.1 million.

The Company drew down an additional $450,000 on the May 2011 Convertible Note with MBTH from January 1, 2013 through January 16, 2013 to finance operating activities of the Company. Additionally, the Company accrued additional interest and fees of $266,000 from January 1, 2013 through January 16, 2013.

F-16


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

9 — CONVERTIBLE NOTES PAYABLE  – (continued)

On January 16, 2013, the Company entered into several agreements as part of negotiations to induce MBTH to convert $15.0 million of the principal balance under the May 2011 Convertible Loan. As part of these negotiations, the Company entered into Amendment Number 1 to the May 2011 Convertible Loan Facility whereby the Company modified the conversion price on the May 2011 Convertible Loan from $26.25 to $13.30 (the “Modified Strike Price”). In addition, the Company agreed to issue MBTH 142,857 common shares upon the exercise in full of MBTH’s conversion rights, termination of the May 2011 Shareholder Loan and the discharge of all MBTH’s collateral over the Company’s assets.

The Company agreed to modify the exercise price on two options representing 571,428 underlying common shares granted to MBTH under the February 2011 Convertible Loan from $17.50 with respect to an option for 285,714 underlying shares and $35.00 with respect to an option for 285,714 common shares to the Modified Strike Price of $13.30. The Company also agreed to compensate MBTH for funding and other costs assumed by MBTH by issuing MBTH 16,474 common shares at the Modified Strike Price for the difference between the interest rate of 8% that the Company owed to MBTH under the May 2011 Convertible Loan and the interest rate of 9.5% that MBTH pays to investors for monies raised by MBTH.

The Company agreed to grant MBTH a warrant to subscribe for 42,857 common shares (the “42,857 Warrant”) with an exercise price of $0.35 per share. The 42,857 Warrant is contingent upon shareholders of MBTH electing to exercise a warrant issued to them by MBTH (the “MBTH Warrant”) in xG Technology, Inc. common shares. If the MBTH shareholder elect not to exercise the MBTH Warrant or they elect to exercise a portion or all of the MBTH Warrant into shares of MBTH, a proportionate number of common shares under the 42,857 Warrant will be issued to MBTH.

The Company agreed to award MBTH an option for 142,857 common shares with an exercise price equal to $8.75 per share.

On January 16, 2013, in consideration of the terms above, MBTH gave the Company notice to its intention to exercise the conversion rights on the 2011 Convertible Loan. On March 26, 2013, the Company issued 1,127,819 common shares to MBTH in consideration of the conversion rights under the May 2011 Convertible Note to convert the principal balance of $15.0 million into common shares at $13.30 per share, and 142,857 common shares were issued for the discharge of MBTH’s collateral over the Company’s assets. The additional consideration described above was considered an induced conversion of the 2011 Convertible Loan. The Company recorded debt inducement for the differential in the value of securities issued to the debt holder under the original terms compared to the value of securities issued to the debt holder under the amended terms. Additionally, the modification of options were accounted for as debt inducement based upon the valuation of the option immediately prior to the amendment compared to the value of the option with the amended terms. As a result of the modified terms, the Company recorded debt inducement of $14.1 million during the year ended December 31, 2013. The inducement was recorded as a reduction and increase to additional paid in capital as MBTH is a related party.

The Company agreed to award MBTH a 3% cash success fee if MBTH arranges additional financing for the Company by a third party (other than the Bridge Loan as defined below) or arranges a merger, consolidation or sale by the Company of substantially all of the assets to a third party.

Bridge Loan

Under a subscription agreement and convertible promissory note (the “Bridge Loan”) between the Company and MBTH dated January 16, 2013, MBTH committed to advance to the Company $5 million as part of a new convertible bridge loan for up to an aggregate of $10 million. The Bridge Loan was issued to refinance principal advances under the May 2011 Convertible Loan in excess of $15 million, all accrued interest and fees under the May 2011 Convertible Loan and for general corporate purposes including; additional working

F-17


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

9 — CONVERTIBLE NOTES PAYABLE  – (continued)

capital and product development. On January 16, 2013, the Company refinanced principal of $2,648,000 and accrued interest of fees of $1,393,000 under the May 2011 Convertible Note for a beginning principal balance of $4,041,000 under the Bridge Loan.

The Bridge Loan was for a term of one year and was convertible, at each loan note holder’s option, into common shares at any time prior to final maturity at $5.225 (95% of $5.50, the price of the Company’s initial public offering completed on July 24, 2013). Interest was payable at 20% per annum, semi-annually in cash or shares, at the option of each loan note holder. The Bridge Loan may be prepaid by the Company in whole (or in part), subject to payment of a minimum of six months’ interest if prepaid within the first six months. The Company may redeem 50% of the Bridge Loan without prepayment penalty by forcing a conversion into shares, provided that the shares are marginable and freely tradable on a liquid exchange, and provided further that, if such forced conversion was effected within six months from the date of the Bridge Loan, then the Company shall pay six month’s interest on the unpaid and unconverted principal balance of the Bridge Loan immediately before such forced conversion (such interest being payable in cash or shares, at the option of each loan note holder).

For every $350 of principal amount of Bridge Loan advanced by MBTH, the loan note holder will be issued one warrant to subscribe one share at a subscription price of $0.35 per share. The warrants are exercisable for a period of five years from issuance. The Company agreed to pay an origination fee of 5% to note holders.

The Company drew down an additional $6,768,000 with MBTH and $2,267,300 with the other investors to finance operating activities through July 18, 2013. Additionally, the Company accrued additional interest and fees of $1,355,000 from January 16, 2013 through July 18, 2013.

On July 18, 2013, the Company exercised its right to force a conversion of 50% of the then outstanding principal balance under the Bridge Loan Agreement and received notification of intent to convert the remaining 50% of the principal balance under the Bridge Loan and all accrued interest and fees from MBTH and other non-related investors that investors holding a total principal balance under the Bridge Loan of $8,910,000 and accrued interest and fees of approximately $1,355,000.

On August 7, 2013, the Company repaid $125,000 to a non-related investor for investment into the Bridge Loan.

On August 22, 2013, the Company refinanced approximately $1,013,000 of liabilities previously paid by MBTH during 2013 on behalf of the Company through the Bridge Loan and incurred an origination fee of approximately $50,000. The Company received notification from MBTH of its intent to convert the principal balance and accrued fees and interest of $101,000.

On August 22, 2013, the Company issued 2,187,529 common shares for the conversion of the balance of approximately $11,429,000 in principal and accrued interest and fees at a price per share of $5.225. Because the Bridge Loan was convertible into shares at 95% of the price of the IPO price, the Company recorded a charge of $0.6 million in interest expense during the year ended December 31, 2013, due to the difference between the IPO price of $5.50 and conversion price of $5.225. Additionally, the Company issued warrants to purchase 1,093,778 underlying shares as additional consideration to the investors who exercised their conversion option. The warrants vested immediately and are exercisable into common shares at an exercise price of $6.87 per share and have a term of five years from the date of issuance.

On August 22, 2013, the Company recorded an inducement charge of $1.8 million for the additional warrants to purchase 1,093,778 underlying shares as additional consideration to the investors who exercised their conversion option. The issuance of the warrants is considered an inducement to convert the Bridge Loan balance as the warrants were issued in addition to the common shares contractually required by the Bridge Loan Agreement. The charge was calculated using the fair market value of the warrant. As a result, the Company recorded during the year ended December 31, 2013, an inducement expense of $0.4 million on the

F-18


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

9 — CONVERTIBLE NOTES PAYABLE  – (continued)

statement of operations for 237,173 warrants given to non-related parties and an inducement of $1.4 million to additional paid in capital for 856,605 warrants given to related parties.

On October 6, 2011, the Company entered into a convertible promissory note (the “$2 million Convertible Note”) in favor of Treco, as part of the settlement compensation to Treco for terminating the infrastructure agreement. The $2 million Convertible Note is payable on final maturity, October 6, 2018 and is convertible, at Treco’s option, into common shares of the Company at a price of $35.00 per share. Interest at the rate of 9% per year is payable semi-annually in cash or shares, at the Company’s option. As of December 31, 2013, $2 million of principal balance was outstanding under the $2 million Convertible Note. The accrued interest at December 31, 2013 was $42,329 and is reflected in the balance sheet as accrued interest and fees. On May 7, 2013, the Company issued 6,923 shares in repayment of $90,000 of interest. On December 2, 2013, the Company issued 34,749 shares in repayment of $90,000 of interest.

10 — INCOME TAXES

The provision (benefit) for income taxes consists of the following:

   
  December 31,
     2013   2012
Current tax provision
                 
Federal   $     $  
State            
              
Deferred tax provision
                 
Federal            
State            
              
Income tax provision   $     $  

A reconciliation of the statutory tax rate to the effective tax rate is as follows:

   
  December 31,
     2013   2012
Statutory Federal income tax (benefit) rate     (35 )%      (35 )% 
State and local taxes net of Federal (benefit)     (5.50 )%      (5.50 )% 
Permanent differences     1.24 %      1.17 % 
Valuation allowance     39.26 %      39.33 % 
Effective tax rate     0 %      0 % 

There were no significant uncertain tax positions taken, or expected to be taken, in a tax return that would be determined to be an unrecognized tax benefit taken or expected to be taken in a tax return that should have been recorded on the Company’s financial statements for the years ended December 31, 2013 or 2012.

F-19


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

10 — INCOME TAXES  – (continued)

Deferred income taxes reflect the tax effects of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial accounting purposes and the amounts used for income tax reporting. Significant components of the Company’s deferred tax assets are as follows:

   
  December 31,
     2013   2012
Deferred tax assets
                 
Net operating loss carry forwards   $ 42,122,000     $ 42,848,000  
Research and development tax credit carry forwards     1,207,000       1,186,000  
Accrued expenses     96,000       1,017,000  
Total deferred tax asset     49,425,000       45,051,000  
Valuation allowance     (49,425,000 )      (45,051,000 ) 
     $     $  

Net operating losses (“NOL”) of approximately $118.8 million will expire beginning in 2027 for federal and state purposes. The Company also has research and development credits of approximately $1.2 million which will begin to expire in 2027.

Realization of the NOL carry forwards and other deferred tax temporary differences is contingent on future taxable earnings. The Company’s deferred tax asset was reviewed for expected utilization using a “more likely than not” approach by assessing the available positive and negative evidence surrounding its recoverability. Accordingly, a valuation allowance has been recorded against the Company’s deferred tax asset, as it was determined based upon past and present losses that it was “more likely than not” that the Company’s deferred tax assets would not be realized. The valuation allowance was increased to the full carrying amount of the Company’s deferred tax assets. In future years, if the deferred tax assets are determined by management to be “more likely than not” to be realized, the recognized tax benefits relating to the reversal of the valuation allowance as of December 31, 2013 will be recorded. The Company will continue to assess and evaluate strategies that will enable the deferred tax asset, or portion thereof, to be utilized, and will reduce the valuation allowance appropriately as such time when it is determined that the “more likely than not” criteria is satisfied. The federal and state tax returns for the years ending December 31, 2010, 2011 and 2012 are currently open.

11 — EQUITY

On March 5, 2013, the Board approved a resolution to amend the Corporation’s Certificate of Incorporation, declaring said resolution to be advisable, and calling for the submission of the following resolution a proposal to authorize the Board to effect a reverse split of the Corporation’s outstanding common stock, at an exchange ratio ranging between 2-to-1 and 50-to-1 at any time prior to the next annual meeting of stockholders. Effective March 24, 2013, holders of outstanding stock having not less than the minimum number of votes that would be necessary to authorize or take such action at a meeting at which all shares entitled to vote thereon were present and voted acting by written consent to approve the Board’s authority to effect the reverse split. On March 24, 2013, we effected a 1-for-25 reverse stock split and on March 28, 2013 we effected a 1-for-1.4 reverse stock split. Upon the effectiveness of the first reverse stock split, every 25 shares of outstanding common stock decreased to one share of common stock. Similarly, the number of shares of common stock into which each outstanding option and warrant to purchase common stock is exercisable decreased on a 1-for-25 basis and the exercise price of each outstanding option and warrant to purchase common stock increased proportionately. Upon the effectiveness of the second reverse stock split, every 1.4 shares of outstanding common stock decreased to one share of common stock and the number of shares of common stock into which each outstanding option and warrant to purchase common stock is exercisable decreased on a 1-for-1.4 basis and the exercise price of each outstanding option and warrant to purchase common stock increased proportionately. The purpose of the second reverse split was to provide for a

F-20


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

11 — EQUITY  – (continued)

cumulative or aggregate reverse split of 1-for-35 taking into account both reverse stock splits. On March 26, 2013, the Board approved a resolution to amend the Corporation’s Certificate of Incorporation, declaring said resolution to be advisable, and calling for the submission of the following resolution a proposal to authorize the Board to decrease the par value $0.01 for common stock per share, to par value $0.00001 per share. All share and per share information has been retroactively adjusted to reflect the reverse stock split.

On March 26, 2013, the Board approved a resolution to amend the Corporation’s Certificate of Incorporation, declaring said resolution to be advisable, and calling for the submission of the following resolution a proposal to authorize the Board to increase common stock from 250,000,000 shares of common stock to 300,000,000 shares common stock per share.

Initial Public Offering

On July 24, 2013, the Company closed its initial public offering of 1,337,792 shares of common stock, par value $0.00001 per share, and warrants to purchase 668,896 shares of common stock, at a purchase price to the public of $5.50 per share and $0.01 per warrant, for net proceeds to the Company, after deducting underwriter discounts and offering expenses, of $6,750,673. The warrants have an exercise price of $6.87 per share and are exercisable immediately and will expire five years from the date of issuance.

Over-allotment Option

On August 19, 2013, the underwriters exercised in full their over-allotment option to purchase an additional 200,668 shares of common stock and warrants to purchase 100,334 shares of common stock with an exercise price of $6.87, at a purchase price to the public of $5.50 per share and $0.01 per warrant, for net proceeds to the Company, after deducting underwriter discounts, of $1,027,349.

Issuance of Shares and Warrants to MBTH

On September 30, 2013, directors of the Company not related with MBTH authorized a onetime agreement, whereby the Company issued to MBTH 1,599,453 shares of common stock and a warrant to purchase 1,363,636 shares of common stock at an exercise price of $6.87 per share for the difference in price between the shares issued to them in March 2013 at a price of $13.30 per share in exchange for the conversion of its 2011 Convertible Note and the $5.50 purchase price for shares sold in our initial public offering in July 2013. Additionally, the Modified Strike Price, agreed upon between the Company and MBTH in January 2013, of $13.30 per share for the two options representing 571,428 underlying shares granted to MBTH in February 2011 has been lowered to $5.50. In connection with the onetime agreement, the Company recorded a total of $10.1 million to Other expense, of which, $7.8 million was the fair market value of the 1,599,453 shares of common stock issued to MBTH; $1.8 million was the fair value of the warrants to purchase 1,363,636 shares of common stock which were issued to MBTH; and $0.5 million was the change in the fair market value immediately before and after the modification of the stock price for options with 571,428 underlying shares.

Secondary Offering

On November 18, 2013, the Company closed its secondary public offering of 5,715,000 shares of common stock, par value $0.00001 per share, at a purchase price to the public of $1.75 per share, for net proceeds to the Company, after deducting underwriter discounts and offering expenses, of $9,146,888. In connection with the offering, the Company issued warrants to the underwriters to purchase 171,450 shares of common stock, for an aggregate price of $100. The warrants have an exercise price of $2.1875 per share and are exercisable immediately and will expire five years from the date of issuance.

F-21


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

11 — EQUITY  – (continued)

Over-allotment Option

On December 12, 2013, the underwriters made a partial exercise of their over-allotment option in which they purchased an additional 255,000 shares of common stock at a purchase price to the public of $1.75 per share, for net proceeds to the Company, after deducting underwriter discounts, of $415,013. The underwriters had an option to purchase up to 857,250 shares of common stock or 15% of the total number of shares offered within 45 days after the closing of the Offering.

Stock Options — Equity Incentive Plans:

The Company’s stock option plans provide for the grant of options to purchase shares of common stock to officers, directors, other key employees and consultants. The purchase price may be paid in cash or “net settled” in shares of the Company’s common stock. In a net settlement of an option, the Company does not require a payment of the exercise price of the option from the optionee, but reduces the number of shares of common stock issued upon the exercise of the option by the smallest number of whole shares that has an aggregate fair market value equal to or in excess of the aggregate exercise price for the option shares covered by the option exercised. Options generally vest over a three year period from the date of grant and expire ten years from the date of grant.

A summary of the Company’s historical stock option plan activity as of December 31, 2013 is as follows:

         
Plan Name   Options Authorized   Options Granted   Shares Exercised   Shares
Forfeited/Expired
  Options Outstanding
2004     142,857       142,857       67,460       24,287       51,110  
2005     142,857       142,857       10,000       58,572       74,285  
2006     314,285       310,102       6,304       65,882       237,916  
2007     28,571       25,714             4,285       21,429  
2009     285,714       358,440       10,041       55,784       292,615  
2013     906,291       305,625                   305,625  
Total     1,820,575       1,285,595       93,805       208,810       982,980  

Under ASC 718, the weighted average fair value of options granted was $1.99 and $15.75 for options granted in 2013 and 2012, respectively. Each option is estimated on the date of grant, using the Black-Scholes model and the following assumptions (all in weighted averages):

   
  2013   2012
Exercise price   $ 2.43     $ 16.45  
Volatility     109 %      145 % 
Risk-free interest rate     1.37 %      1.42 % 
Expected dividend yield     0 %      0 % 
Expected term (years)     6       9.2  

The risk-free rate is based on the rate for the U.S. Treasury note over the expected term of the option. The expected term for employees represents the period of time that options granted are expected to be outstanding using the simplified method, for non-employee options the expected term is the full term of the option. Expected volatility is based on the average of the weekly share price changes over the shorter of the expected term or the period from the placement on AIM to the date of the grant. The forfeiture rate is based on historical data related to prior option grants, as we believe such historical data will be similar to future results.

F-22


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

11 — EQUITY  – (continued)

A summary of the status of the Company’s stock option plans for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 is as follows:

   
  Number of Options
(in Shares)
  Weighted
Average
Exercise Price
Options Outstanding January 1, 2012     653,896     $ 39.90  
Granted     71,000       16.45  
Exercised     660       7.70  
Forfeited or Expired     23,333       22.40  
Options outstanding, December 31, 2012     700,903       38.15  
Exercisable, December 31, 2012     513,603     $ 47.60  
Options Outstanding, January 1, 2013     700,903     $ 38.15  
Granted     334,161       2.43  
Exercised            
Forfeited or Expired     52,084       13.16  
Options outstanding, December 31, 2013     982,980       28.05  
Exercisable, December 31, 2013     571,261     $ 44.79  

Summary information regarding the options outstanding and exercisable at December 31, 2013 is as follows:

         
  Outstanding   Exercisable
Range of Exercise Prices   Number Outstanding (in shares)   Weighted Average Remaining Contractual Life (in years)   Weighted Average
Exercise Price
  Number Exercisable (in shares)   Weighted Average Exercise Price
$1.05 – 8.05     429,705       9.10     $ 3.36       96,111     $ 7.12  
8.40 – 23.80     282,795       4.69       14.16       204,670       14.02  
35.00 – 70.00     241,133       2.22       68.74       241,133       68.74  
122.50 – 288.75     29,347       3.08       187.26       29,347       187.26  
       982,980                   571,261        

Under the provisions of ASC 718, the Company recorded approximately $796,000 and $554,000 of stock based compensation expense for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Stock based compensation for employees was approximately $421,000 and $371,000 and stock based compensation expense for non-employees was approximately $375,000 and $183,000 for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. As of December 31, 2013 and 2012, there was approximately $1.2 million and $1.6 million, respectively, of unrecognized compensation cost related to non-vested options under the plans.

In 2013, no options were exercised and in 2012, the Company received proceeds of $2,000 from the exercise of options with 238 underlying shares. In 2012, options for 422 underlying shares were net settled through cashless exercises. The intrinsic value of options exercised in 2013 and 2012 were $0 and $5,000, respectively. The intrinsic value of options exercisable at December 31, 2013 and 2012 was $0 and $996,000, respectively. The total fair value of shares vested during 2013 and 2012 was $846,000 and $619,000, respectively.

Deferred tax benefits recognized from the timing difference of recognizing stock based compensation expense per the financial statements compared to the income tax return has been fully reserved for as the Company is in a net loss position. No windfall tax benefits have been recognized for the exercise of stock options.

F-23


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

11 — EQUITY  – (continued)

Warrants:

The Company has issued warrants, outside of the equity incentive plans, at exercise prices equal to or greater than market value of the Company’s common stock at the date of issuance.

A summary of the warrant and option activity is as follows:

   
  Number of
Options/Warrants
(in Shares)
  Weighted
Average
Exercise Price
Warrants Outstanding January 1, 2012     629,160     $ 24.85  
Granted     8,571       35.00  
Exercised            
Forfeited or Expired     43,446        
Warrants Outstanding, December 31, 2012     594,285       25.90  
Exercisable, December 31, 2012     594,285     $ 25.90  
Warrants Outstanding, January 1, 2013     594,285     $ 25.90  
Granted     3,652,669       6.61  
Exercised     858       0.35  
Forfeited or Expired            
Warrants Outstanding, December 31, 2013     4,246,096       6.53  
Exercisable, December 31, 2013     4,246,096     $ 6.53  

Summary information regarding the warrants as of December 31, 2013 is as follows:

   
Exercise Price   Number Outstanding (in shares)   Weighted Average Remaining
Contractual Life
(in years)
$0.35     70,726       4.65  
$2.19     171,450       4.89  
$5.50     571,428       2.13  
$6.87     3,266,778       4.66  
$7.87     14,286       1.28  
$8.75     142,857       4.04  
$35.00     8,571       3.20  
Exercisable, December 31, 2013     4,246,096        

The Company issued a warrant to purchase 8,571 common shares of the Company to a non-employee on March 28, 2012. The warrant was fully vested on the date of issuance and the Company recorded stock based compensation expense for non-employees of $143,000. The Company used the following assumptions in the Black Scholes model to calculate the fair value of the warrant on March 28, 2012:

 
  2012
Exercise price   $ 35.00  
Black-Scholes     16.68  
Volatility     149 % 
Risk-free interest rate     1.13 % 
Expected dividend yield     0 % 
Expected term (years)     5.00  

The risk-free rate is based on the rate for the U.S. Treasury note over the expected term of the warrant. The expected term for non-employee warrants is the full term of the warrant. Expected volatility is based on the

F-24


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

11 — EQUITY  – (continued)

average of the weekly share price changes over the shorter of the expected term or the period from the placement on AIM to the date of the grant.

The modification of the existing options with MBTH (refer to Note 9 — Convertible Notes Payable) was considered an induced conversion. The Company calculated the value of the options immediately prior to the amendment compared to the value of the option with the amended terms.

The Company agreed to modify the exercise price on two options representing 571,428 underlying common shares granted to MBTH under the February 2011 Convertible Loan from $13.30 to the Modified Strike Price of $5.50. The Company calculated the value of the options immediately prior to the amendment compared to the value of the option with the amended terms.

The Company used the following assumptions in the Black Scholes Model to calculate the fair value of the warrants:

   
  January 16, 2013 Amended Terms   September 30, 2013 Amended Terms
Exercise Price   $ 13.30     $ 5.50  
Black-Scholes Value   $ 10.35     $ 2.93  
Volatility     140 %      109.8 % 
Risk-free interest rate     0.27 %      0.13 % 
Expected dividend yield     0 %      0 % 
Expected term (years)     3       3  

The Company agreed to award MBTH an option for 142,857 common shares with an exercise price equal to $8.75 per share. The warrants are exercisable for a period of five years from issuance and are fully vested on the date of issuance. The Company agreed to award MBTH an option for 42,857 common shares with an exercise price equal to $0.35 per share. The warrants are exercisable for a period of five years from issuance and are fully vested on the date of issuance.

For every $350 of principal amount of Bridge Loan advanced by a loan note holder, the loan note holder was issued a warrant for one underlying share with an exercise price of $0.35 per share. The warrants for 28,727 underlying shares are exercisable for a period of five years from issue and are fully vested on the date of issuance. The warrants were issued in connection with the Bridge Loan and were recorded as a debt discount of $401,000 against the Bridge Loan. The Company used the following weighted average assumptions in the Black Scholes model to calculate the fair value of the warrants:

On November 19, 2013, in connection with the secondary offering, the Company issued warrants to the underwriters to purchase 171,450 shares of common stock with an exercise price of $2.1875 per share and are exercisable immediately and will expire five years from the date of issuance.

       
  January 16, 2013   March 12, 2013   Bridge Loan   November 19, 2013
Number of shares     142,857       42,857       28,727       171,450  
Exercise Price   $ 8.75     $ 0.35     $ 0.35     $ 2.1875  
Black-Scholes Value   $ 13.57     $ 14.71     $ 5.98 to $14.71     $ 1.20  
Volatility     139.9 %      137.7 %      104.4 %      108.4 % 
Risk-free interest rate     0.75 %      0.88 %      0.68 %      1.37 % 
Expected dividend yield     0 %      0 %      0 %      0 % 
Expected term (years)     5       5       5       5  

F-25


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

11 — EQUITY  – (continued)

The risk-free rate is based on the rate for the U.S. Treasury note over the expected term of the warrants. The expected term is the full term of the warrant. Expected volatility is based on the average of the weekly share price changes over the shorter of the expected term or the period from the placement on AIM to the date of the grant.

The Company issued warrants to purchase 1,093,778 underlying shares as additional consideration to the investors who exercised their conversion option. The warrants vested immediately and are exercisable into common shares at an exercise price of $6.87 per share and have a term of five years from the date of issuance.

The Company agreed to award MBTH a warrant to purchase 1,363,636 shares of our common stock with an exercise price equal to $6.87 per share. The warrants are exercisable for a period of five years from issuance and are fully vested on the date of issuance. The Company used the trading price to calculate the fair value of the warrants.

On July 24, 2013, the Company closed its initial public offering and issued warrants to purchase 668,896 shares of common stock with an exercise price of $6.87 per share. The warrants are exercisable immediately and will expire five years from the date of issuance. The Company issued warrants to the underwriters to purchase 40,134 shares of common stock with an exercise price of $6.87 per share. The warrants are exercisable immediately and will expire five years from the date of issuance.

On August 19, 2013, the underwriters exercised in full their over-allotment option and they received warrants to purchase 100,334 shares of common stock with an exercise price of $6.87 per share. The warrants are exercisable immediately and will expire five years from the date of issuance.

The Company used the XGTIW trading price to value these warrants as the warrants issued had identical terms to the warrants traded on the market.

The Company cancelled a warrant to purchase 43,446 common shares of the Company to the non-employee on March 22, 2012. Pursuant to an agreement, warrants issued to the non-employee upon inception of engagement were to be performance based. Pursuant to a mutual agreement with the Company, these warrants will not be exercised and have been cancelled. The cumulative compensation expense of $194,000 was reversed during 2012 upon cancelation.

12 — RETIREMENT PLAN

The Company has a 401(k) plan for all full–time employees who have attained the age of 21 and completed 90 days. The Company does not provide any match for the 401(k).

13 — COMMITMENTS

The Company’s office rental, deployment sites and warehouse facilities expenses aggregated approximately $304,000 and $287,000 of which approximately $83,000 and $106,000 was capitalized during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The leases will expire on different dates from 2014 through 2016. The company also entered into contract agreements with two of its principal vendors to provide parts for production. Total obligation of purchasing parts under contractual agreements, minimum future annual rentals, exclusive of real estate taxes and related costs, are approximately as follows:

 
Year Ending December 31,
2014   $ 2,523,000  
2015     309,000  
2016     201,000  
     $ 3,033,000  

F-26


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

13 — COMMITMENTS  – (continued)

The Company has an employment agreement with its CEO, John Coleman, for a term of three years with automatic renewals unless terminated. Mr. Coleman’s agreement was effective on August 1, 2011. It provides that he will receive a salary of no less than $250,000 per year, subject to annual increases as determined by the Board. In addition, he is entitled to incentive compensation not to exceed two (2) times his base salary. The incentive compensation is payable in shares of common stock at the Company’s discretion. He is also entitled to participate in all other benefits that the Company may provide to other senior executives. The agreement contains a non-compete and non-solicitation agreement.

14 — CONCENTRATIONS

During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company recorded individual sales of $83,000 (20%), $158,000 (39%) and $114,000 (28%) in excess of 10% of the Company’s total sales.

At December 31, 2013, approximately 79% of net accounts receivable was due from three customers and 37% of net accounts receivable was due from one customer.

During the year ended December 31, 2013, approximately 15% of the Company’s inventory purchases were derived from one vendor.

15 — RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

MBTH

As of December 31, 2013 MBTH owned approximately 33% of the Company’s outstanding shares, which represents a controlling interest. The Company has entered into convertible notes with MBTH refer to Note 9 — Convertible Notes Payable.

Due from Related Party

On November 20, 2013, the Company paid $1,350,000 to MBTH which is recorded as a related party receivable as of December 31, 2013. On January 7, 2014, MBTH paid the company $1,350,000 in repayment of the receivable balance.

Due to Related Party

Effective July 1, 2011, by agreement of a committee of the Directors who did not own interests in MBTH, the Company entered into an arrangement with MBTH whereby MBTH assumed certain liabilities of the Company including certain payroll, management fees and other operating costs in the amount of $250,000 per month for a period of twelve months. In consideration for this agreement, the Company issued MBTH 342,857 shares on June 23, 2011 at a price of $8.75 per share for proceeds of $3 million. On July 1, 2012 the agreement with MBTH to assume liabilities of the Company expired. Subsequent to the assumption of liability agreement and through December 31, 2013, MBTH paid additional liabilities on behalf of the Company amounting to $3.6 million. From January 1, 2013 through December 31, 2013, MBTH paid additional liabilities on the behalf of the Company of approximately $2,506,000, the Company repaid MBTH $1,065,000 for liabilities previously paid by MBTH, and the Company refinanced $1,013,000 of liabilities previously paid by MBTH into the Bridge Loan (see Note 9 – Convertible Notes Payable) for a net increase in the related party liability of $428,000. The due to related party balance was $1,526,000 as of December 31, 2013.

On September 30, 2013, the independent directors of the Company not related with MBTH authorized a onetime agreement, whereby we issued to MBTH 1,599,453 shares of our common stock and a warrant to purchase 1,363,636 shares of our common stock at an exercise price of $6.87 per share for the difference in price between the shares issued to them in March 2013 at a price of $13.30 per share in exchange for the conversion of its 2011 Convertible Note and the $5.50 purchase price for shares sold in our initial public offering in July 2013. Additionally, the Modified Strike Price, agreed upon between the Company and MBTH in January 2013, of $13.30 per share for the two options representing 571,428 underlying shares granted to MBTH in February 2011 has been lowered to $5.50. See Note 11 — Equity.

F-27


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
 
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

15 — RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS  – (continued)

Deferred Revenue

On October 16, 2013, the Company completed the first delivery of our xMax comprehensive cognitive radio system, shipping equipment required to fulfill the $155,000 purchase order that was received from rural broadband provider Walnut Hill Telephone Company on November 26, 2012. Larry Townes is Chairman of Townes Tele-Communications, Inc., the parent company of Walnut Hill Telephone Company. Given that Larry Townes is a director of xG Technology, the sale of equipment to Walnut Hill Telephone Company is considered to be a related party transaction. Due to Walnut Hill Telephone Company waiting for the equipment to meet certain technical specifications, the revenue from this transaction is considered deferred revenue as of December 31, 2013.

On December 16, 2013, the Company sold our xMax comprehensive cognitive radio system to Haxtun Telephone Company for $301,000 to fulfill a purchase order that was received on November 24, 2012. Larry Townes is Chairman of Townes Tele-Communications, Inc., the parent company of Haxtun Telephone Company. Given that Larry Townes is a director of xG Technology, the sale of equipment to Haxtun Telephone Company is considered to be a related party transaction. Due to Haxtun Telephone Company waiting for the equipment to meet certain technical specifications, the revenue from this transaction is considered deferred revenue as of December 31, 2013.

Mooers Branton & Co. Incorporated

On March 2, 2006, the Company entered into a management agreement (the “Management Agreement”) with Mooers Branton & Co. Incorporated (“MBC”), a Florida corporation, pursuant to which MBC agreed to provide certain management and financial services to the Company for a monthly fee of $80,000. The Management Agreement was effective January 1, 2006. The Company incurred fees related to the Management Agreement of $960,000 in the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, of which $960,000 was assumed by MBTH in 2013 and 2012. MBC is beneficially controlled and operated by Rick Mooers and Roger Branton, a director and the Chief Financial Officer, respectively, of the Company.

16 — CONTINGENCIES

The Company is subject, from time to time, to claims by third parties under various legal theories. The defense of such claims, or any adverse outcome relating to any such claims, could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s liquidity, financial condition and cash flows. For the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, the Company did not have any legal actions pending.

17 — SUBSEQUENT EVENTS

The cancellation of the Company’s common stock on the London Stock Exchange’s AIM Market became effective January 3, 2014. On December 20, 2013, the shareholders approved the cancellation of admission to trading the Company’s common stock on the London Stock Exchange’s AIM Market.

On January 7, 2014, the Company received $1,350,000 from MBTH. As of December 31, 2013, this amount was recorded as a due from a related party.

F-28


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GLOSSARY

As used herein, the terms set forth below shall have the following meaning:

3G (Third Generation Cellular) — A mobile wireless technology that typically offered a minimum data rate of 2 Megabits/second (Mbits/s, or millions of bits per second) for stationary or walking users, and 384 kilobits/second in a moving vehicle. This system is currently being upgraded to the new 4G LTE technology (see below).

4G (Fourth Generation Cellular) — A successor to 3G cellular technology. Long Term Evolution (LTE) is the most widely deployed 4G technology and has a theoretical net bit rate capacity of up to 100 Mbits/s in the downlink and 50 Mbits/s in the uplink if a 20 MegaHertz (MHz) channel is used.

Broadband — A telecommunications signaling method that includes or handles a relatively high rate of data transfer (typically measured in the range of Mbits/s). Also used as a descriptive term for evolving digital technologies that provide consumers a signal-switched facility offering integrated access to voice, high-speed data, video, and interactive delivery services.

Carrier-Class — Refers to a wireless system that is extremely reliable, well-tested and proven in its capabilities to deliver an exceptional level of service and performance.

Cognitive Radio — An approach to wireless engineering wherein the radio, radio network, or wireless system is endowed with awareness, reason, and agility to intelligently adapt operational aspects of the radio, radio network, or wireless system. Cognitive radios are intelligent enough to make informed decisions on when, how and where to transmit based on past usage and current conditions without manual intervention. They are designed with a high level of agility that enables them to adapt their modulation, frequency, power and other parameters to the available wireless spectrum. This ability to adjust their characteristics (in real time) depending on interference and other conditions of their environment helps ensure optimized transmissions. Cognitive radio is also referred to as agile radio or smart radio.

Competitive Local Exchange Carrier (CLEC) — An organization offering local telephone service that competes with the already established local telephone business by providing its own network and switching infrastructure. The term distinguishes new or potential competitors from established local exchange carriers (LECs) and arises from the Telecommunications Act of 1996, which was intended to promote competition among both long-distance and local phone service providers. Many CLECs specialize in one type of service such as fixed wireless or digital subscriber lines (DSL), while others offer a range of services.

CTIA — The CTIA is an international non-profit membership organization that has represented the wireless communications industry since 1984. Membership in the association is primarily made up of large and incumbent wireless carriers and their suppliers, as well as providers and manufacturers of wireless data services and products. The association advocates on behalf of its members at all levels of government.

DSP (Digital Signal Processor) — Specialized microprocessors used for the mathematical manipulation of an information signal to modify or improve it in some way. DSPs are used in a wide range of applications including signal processing for communications, control of systems, digital image processing, audio and speech signal processing.

Dynamic Spectrum Access — A radio software solution that enables a device to dynamically sense and adapt to its radio frequency (RF) environment to maintain reliable communications, even in the presence of potentially harmful interference. Dynamic spectrum access techniques can dramatically improve spectrum efficiency, communications reliability, and system deployment time.

Fading — In wireless communications, fading is the dynamic attenuation of a signal’s strength. Fading is quite common in mobile systems and can be caused by the movement of either the transmitter or receiver (or both) and/or movement in the environment, such as a tree branch swaying, rain or snow or a passing vehicle.

Interference Mitigation — The ability to minimize or mitigate interference, a major issue limiting performance of wide area wireless networks. Interference can be caused by transmitting elements within the

G-1


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

network (self-interference) or from third party devices that are part of another network (external interference). The ability to mitigate interference greatly increases the throughput, reliability and range for wireless communications links.

Internet Protocol (IP) — The primary component and communications protocol that underpins the global system of interconnected computer networks (i.e., the World Wide Web). Internet Protocol consists of a set of digital message formats and rules for exchanging information between computers across a single network or a series of interconnected networks. The main purpose and task of Internet Protocol is the delivery of blocks of data called data packets from the source host (source computer) to the destination host (receiving computer) based on their addresses.

Licensed Frequencies — The Federal Communications Commission in the U.S., and similar agencies in other countries, control the use of wireless spectrum (i.e., frequencies). Part of the spectrum in most countries is controlled for military use, public safety and commercial services. Only the entities so entitled may use the frequency bands they have rights to. Licenses to these bands may be allocated at no cost to the network operator as in the case of public safety and military use. However commercial users of licensed frequencies can, and have, paid billions of dollars for regional or national spectrum licenses.

LMR (Land Mobile Radio) — Also called public land mobile radio or private land mobile radio, LMR is a term that denotes a wireless communications system intended for use by terrestrial users in vehicles (mobiles) or on foot (portables). Such systems are used by emergency first responder organizations, public works organizations, or companies with large vehicle fleets or numerous field staff. Such a system can be independent, but often can be connected to other fixed systems, such as the public switched telephone network (PSTN) or cellular networks. Land mobile radio systems are also used in the United States Department of Defense’s communication systems.

MAC (Media Access Control) — A sub layer within the link control layer (layer 2) in the OSI 7 layer model. This layer manages the interaction of devices with a shared medium. The MAC sub layer provides addressing and channel access control mechanisms that make it possible for several terminals or network nodes to communicate within a multiple access network that incorporates a shared medium (i.e., a wireless channel). The “MAC” is a critical part of the software within the radio system needed to make a wireless network operate.

MANET (Mobile Ad hoc Network) — A type of network with elements that can change locations and configure themselves on the fly. Because MANETs are mobile, they use wireless connections to connect to various networks and end user devices. MANET systems are used where reliability and redundant communications paths are paramount.

MIMO — Multiple-input and multiple-output (commonly pronounced my-moh or me-moh), is the use of multiple antennas at both the transmitter and receiver to improve communication performance. It is one of several forms of smart antenna technology.

Mobile Virtual Network Enabler (MVNE) — A company that provides services to mobile virtual network operators, such as billing, network element provisioning, administration, operations, business support systems and operations support systems, and provision of back-end network elements, to enable provision of mobile network services like cellular phone connectivity. An MVNE does not have a relationship with end-user customers. Instead, an MVNE provides infrastructure and services to enable Mobile Virtual Network Operators (MVNOs) to offer services and have a relationship with end-user customers. MVNEs offer the ability for MVNOs to focus on their core strengths of brand, customer loyalty and marketing and leave the back-end enablement and operations to MVNEs.

MoS (Mean Opinion Score) — MoS is used as a subjective rating of telephone communications quality in which listeners judge transmissions by qualifiers, such as excellent, good, fair, poor, or unsatisfactory.

OFDM — Orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing is a method of encoding digital data on multiple carrier frequencies. OFDM has developed into a popular scheme for wideband digital communication.

Part 15 rules — An oft-quoted part of Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations regarding unlicensed transmissions. It is a part of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), and

G-2


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

regulates everything from spurious emissions to unlicensed low-power broadcasting such as that used by Wi-Fi and Bluetooth devices. xMax® is subject to Part 15 rules.

PCAST (President’s Council of Advisors on Science and Technology) — An advisory group of the nation’s leading scientists and engineers who directly advise the President and the Executive Office of the President. PCAST makes policy recommendations in the many areas where understanding of science, technology, and innovation apply. In 2012, PCAST recommended spectrum sharing as the primary means to address the looming spectrum crisis.

QoS (Quality of Service) — The performance specification of a communications channel or system. QoS may be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio (S/N), bit error ratio (BER), message throughput rate, and call blocking probability.

RF (Radio Frequency) — Is a rate of oscillation in the range of about 3 kHz to 300 GHz, which corresponds to the frequency of radio waves, and the alternating currents which carry radio signals. The terms are also used as a synonym for radio — i.e., to describe the use of wireless communication, as opposed to communication via electric wires.

SDR — Software-defined radio is a radio communication system where components that have been typically implemented in hardware are instead implemented by means of software on an embedded computing device. While the concept of SDR is not new, the rapidly evolving capabilities of digital electronics render practical many processes which used to be only theoretically possible. A software-defined radio can be flexible enough to avoid the “limited spectrum” assumptions of designers of previous kinds of radios, in one or more ways.

SON (Self Organizing Network) — A process whereby coordination arises out of the local interactions between network components, typically end user devices and core network elements. It is not directed or controlled by any external agent or pre-planning, but arises out of the RF sensing capabilities and intelligence built into the network elements. As such, it is typically very robust and able to survive and self-repair substantial damage or changes.

Spectrum Agnostic — A cognitive radio system designed to utilize a wide range of frequency bands. This is in contrast to traditional radios that are programmed to operate in fixed, specific frequencies. Spectrum-agnostic capability is beneficial since the FCC and wireless regulatory bodies around the world are in the process of opening up new spectrum, as well as reclassifying existing spectrum, to be made available for “opportunistic use” (use by cognitive radios).

TV White Spaces — TV White Spaces (TVWS) are unused TV broadcast channels, made available through the transition from analog to digital TV. In the U.S. they comprise approximately 200MHz of spectrum from the top of the VHF (Very High Frequency, 30 MHz to 300 MHz) band to the bottom of the UHF (Ultra High Frequency, 300 MHz and 3 GHz) band. In 2010, the FCC made TVWS spectrum available for unlicensed public use. TVWS have important benefits that make them highly desirable for wireless communications, including the ability to cover a greater area at a relative lower cost than typical Wi-Fi signals and non-line-of-sight performance offering the ability to penetrate obstacles such as trees, buildings, and rugged terrain. Under FCC regulation, in order to utilize this unlicensed spectrum band, devices must communicate with a database to obtain a list of currently available white space channels and ensure incumbent users are protected. The available channels may vary, depending on device type and location.

Unlicensed Frequencies — Unlicensed or license-free spectrum as it is sometimes called simply means a spectrum band that does not require operators or users to purchase a frequency use license from a national regulator (e.g., the FCC). Typically, these frequencies have rules that limit maximum transmit power and interference to ensure the band can be shared among many users. Any person or entity that uses approved equipment (which is pre-certified by the manufacturer) can put up a license-free network at any time for either private or public purposes, including commercial high speed Internet service.

USF (Universal Service Fund) — A US government program that collects money from fees on phone services to fund universal access to communications services across the United States. Among its many goals is the mandate to advance the availability of telecom services to all consumers, including those in low income, rural, insular, and high cost areas at rates that are reasonably comparable to those charged in urban areas.

G-3


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Funds are used to subsidize the provisioning of services to high-cost geographies and constituents that would not be economical for private industry alone to provide. On October 27, 2011, the FCC approved a six-year transfer process that would transition money from the Universal Service Fund High-Cost Program to a new $4.5 billion per year Connect America Fund for broadband Internet expansion, effectively putting an end to the USF High-Cost Fund by 2018.

Wireless Internet Service Provider (WISP) — An Internet service provider that allows users to connect to a server through a wireless connection such as Wi-Fi. WISPs provide additional services such as virtual private networking VoIP and location-based content. In the U.S., wireless networking is mainly chosen by isolated municipal Internet Service Providers and large state-wide initiatives. WISPs are more popular in rural areas, where the users may not be able to access cable and DSL wired connections for Internet access.

Wireless Spectrum — Refers to the radio portion of the electromagnetic spectrum. The radio spectrum spans a certain, limited frequency range. The range of frequencies is fixed and limited, being determined by physics. The range of frequencies with properties useful for cell phones is smaller still. Therefore, in the U.S., the FCC governs the allocation of these frequencies.

VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) — Refers to the communication protocols, technologies, methodologies, and transmission techniques involved in the delivery of voice communications and multimedia sessions over IP networks, such as the Internet. Using IP networks as a transmission medium is in contrast to traditional circuit transmissions used by the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network).

G-4


 
 


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

        Shares

Common Stock

 
 
 
 

[GRAPHIC MISSING]

 
 
 
 


PRELIMINARY PROSPECTUS

 

Sole Book-Running Lead Manager

Roth Capital Partners


Co-Manager

Feltl and Company

           , 2014

 

 


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART II
  
INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

ITEM 13. Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution.

The expenses (other than underwriting discounts and expenses) payable by us in connection with this offering are as follows:

 
  Amount
SEC registration fee   $ 1,481.20  
FINRA fee     *  
NASDAQ listing fee     *  
Printing and mailing expenses     *  
Accounting fees and expenses     *  
Legal fees and expenses     *  
Transfer agent fees and expenses     *  
Miscellaneous         *      
Total expenses   $ 1,481.20  

All expenses are estimated except for the SEC fee, the FINRA fee and the NASDAQ listing fee.

* To be completed by amendment

ITEM 14. Indemnification of Directors and Officers.

The Delaware General Corporation Law and certain provisions of our certificate of incorporation and bylaws under certain circumstances provide for indemnification of our officers, directors and controlling persons against liabilities which they may incur in such capacities. A summary of the circumstances in which such indemnification is provided for is contained herein, but this description is qualified in its entirety by reference to our certificate of incorporation, bylaws and to the statutory provisions.

In general, any officer, director, employee or agent may be indemnified against expenses, fines, settlements or judgments arising in connection with a legal proceeding to which such person is a party, if that person’s actions were in good faith, were believed to be in our best interest, and with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, such person had no reasonable cause to believe their actions were unlawful. Unless such person is successful upon the merits in such an action, indemnification may be awarded only after a determination by independent decision of the board of directors, by legal counsel, or by a vote of the stockholders, that the applicable standard of conduct was met by the person to be indemnified.

The circumstances under which indemnification is granted in connection with an action brought on our behalf is generally the same as those set forth above; however, with respect to such actions, indemnification is granted only with respect to expenses actually incurred in connection with the defense or settlement of the action. In such actions, unless the court determines otherwise, the person to be indemnified must have acted in good faith and in a manner believed to have been in our best interest, and have not been adjudged liable to the corporation.

Indemnification may also be granted pursuant to the terms of agreements which we are currently party to with each of our directors and executive officers, agreements which we may enter into in the future or pursuant to a vote of stockholders or directors. Delaware law and our certificate of incorporation also grant the power to us to purchase and maintain insurance which protects our officers and directors against any liabilities incurred in connection with their service in such a position, and such a policy may be obtained by us.

A stockholder’s investment may be adversely affected to the extent we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards against directors and officers as required by these indemnification provisions. There is no pending litigation or proceeding involving any of our directors, officers or employees regarding which indemnification by us is sought, nor are we aware of any threatened litigation that may result in claims for indemnification.

II-1


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers or persons controlling us pursuant to the foregoing provisions, we have been informed that, in the opinion of the SEC, this indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is therefore unenforceable.

ITEM 15. Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities.

During the last three completed fiscal years and to date in the current fiscal year, we sold the following unregistered securities:

   
Capital Raise   # Of Shares  
Issuance of options to MBTH     285,714       February 7, 2011  
Issuance of options to MBTH     285,714       February 7, 2011  
Issuance of $10 million Convertible Note to MBTH           February 8, 2011  
Options granted to employees pursuant to 2009 Option Plan     9,282       Quarter ended
March 31, 2011
 
Warrants granted to Mats Wennberg exercisable at $7.87 per share     14,285       April 14, 2011  
Issue of shares to Treco pursuant to Settlement Agreement     64,285       April 14, 2011  
Issuance of $15 million Convertible Note to MBTH           May 19, 2011  
Conversion of MBTH Convertible Note $10 million     1,142,857       June 23, 2011  
Options granted to employees pursuant to 2009 Option Plan     163,429       Quarter ended
June 30, 2011
 
Payment of interest to MBTH until 7/31/11 in stock     111,511       August 15, 2011  
Assumption of liabilities by MBTH for $3 million at $8.75 per share     342,857       August 15, 2011  
Issue of shares to First Columbus as our Joint Broker     1,383       September 23, 2011  
Quarterly issue of shares to an employee as part remuneration for services     1,580       September 23, 2011  
Options granted to employees pursuant to 2009 Option Plan     9,284       Quarter ended
September 30, 2011
 
Issuance of $2 million Convertible Note           October 6, 2011  
Quarterly issue of shares to an employee as part remuneration for services     571       October 21, 2011  
Options granted to employees pursuant to 2009 Option Plan     1,856       Quarter ended
December 31, 2011
 
Quarterly issue of shares to an employee as part remuneration for services     785       January 16, 2012  
Warrants issued to Secure Strategy Group exercisable at $35.00 per share     8,571       March 14, 2012  
Placement of shares at $35.00 each to certain individual investors pursuant to Regulation S     11,428       March 20, 2012  
Options granted to employees pursuant to 2009 Option Plan     1,428       Quarter ended
March 31, 2012
 
Quarterly issue of shares to an employee as part remuneration for services     785       April 23, 2012  
Payment of interest on $2 million promissory note to Treco in stock at $20.13     4,472       May 2, 2012  
Options granted to employees pursuant to 2009 Option Plan     3,141       Quarter ended
June 30, 2012
 
Quarterly issue of shares to an employee as part remuneration for services     761       August 13, 2012  
Options granted to employees pursuant to 2009 Option Plan     66,425       Quarter ended
September 30, 2012
 
Payment of interest on $2 million promissory note to Treco in stock at $15.75     5,714       October 8, 2012  
Quarterly issue of shares to an employee as part remuneration for services     882       November 13, 2012  
Quarterly issue of shares to an employee as part remuneration for services     976       January 14, 2013  
Issue of shares to an employee as remuneration for services     159       January 14, 2013  

II-2


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

   
Capital Raise   # Of Shares  
Issuance of options to MBTH     142,857       January 16, 2013  
Warrants issued to MBTH exercisable at $0.35 per share     42,857       January 16, 2013  
Conversion of MBTH Convertible Note $15 million     1,127,819       March 26, 2013  
Issue of shares to MBTH pursuant to the discharge of all MBTH collateral over the company’s assets     142,857       March 26, 2013  
Issuance of warrants to Bridge Loan investors exerciseable at $0.35     17,788       Quarter ended
March 31, 2013
 
Options granted to employees pursuant to 2009 Option Plan     10,736       Quarter ended
March 31, 2013
 
Quarterly issue of shares to an employee as part remuneration for services     1,156       May 1, 2013  
Payment of interest on $2 million promissory note to Treco in stock at $13.00     6,923       May 1, 2013  
Issuance of warrants to Bridge Loan investors exerciseable at $0.35     5,844       Quarter ended
June 30, 2013
 
Options granted to employees pursuant to 2009 Option Plan     17,800       Quarter ended
June 30, 2013
 
Issuance of warrants to Bridge Loan investors exerciseable at $0.35     5,095       July 18, 2013  
Issuance of shares to MBTH and other investors pursuant to conversion of Bridge Loans     2,187,529       July 18, 2013  
Issuance of warrants to MBTH and other investors pursuant to conversion of Bridge Loans     1,093,778       July 18, 2013  
Additional issuance of shares to MBTH and other investors pursuant to onetime agreement approved on September 30, 2013     1,599,453       September 30, 2013  
Additional issuance of warrants to MBTH and other investors pursuant to onetime agreement approved on September 30, 2013     1,363,636       September 30, 2013  
Payment to MBTH of the differential of the interest rates in stock at $13.30     16,474       November 19, 2013  
Options granted to employees pursuant to 2013 Option Plan     305,625       November 19, 2013  
Payment of interest on $2 million promissory note to Treco in stock at $2.59     34,749       December 2, 2013  
Issuance of shares to consultant     7,665       December 2, 2013  
Quarterly issue of shares to an employee as part remuneration for services     5,283       December 9, 2013  
Quarterly issue of shares to an employee as part remuneration for services     10,079       January 15, 2014  
Issuance of shares to directors of the company as part of remuneration for services     8,973       January 15, 2014  
Issue of shares to employees pursuant to the 2011 and 2012 accrued bonus     99,202       February 5, 2014  

No underwriters were involved in the foregoing sales of securities. The issuances of the securities described above were deemed to be exempt from registration under the Securities Act in reliance on Section 4(a)(2) of the Securities Act or Rule 701 promulgated under Section 3(b) of the Securities Act or Regulation S promulgated under the Securities Act. The recipients of securities in some but not all such transactions represented their intention to acquire the securities for investment only and not with a view to or for sale in connection with any distribution thereof and appropriate legends were affixed to the stock certificates and option agreements issued in such transactions. All recipients had adequate access, through their relationships with us, to information about us.

II-3


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ITEM 16. Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.

(a)

 
Exhibit Number   Description of Exhibit
 1.1†   Form of Underwriting Agreement
3.1   Amended & Restated Certificate of Incorporation(1)
3.2   Amended & Restated Bylaws(2)
4.1   Form of Common Stock Certificate of the Registrant(3)
4.2   Form of Warrant Agreement by and between the Registrant and Continental Stock Transfer & Trust Company and Form of Warrant Certificate for the offering closed July 24, 2013 and August 19, 2013(4)
4.3   Form of Underwriters’ Warrant for the offering closed July 24, 2013(1)
4.4   Form of Underwriters’ Warrant for the offering closed November 18, 2013(5)
 5.1†   Opinion of Robinson Brog Leinwand Greene Genovese & Gluck P.C.
10.1    Form of Customer Documents Purchase Agreements, and Distribution Agreement(6)
10.2    Form of Indemnification Agreement(6)
10.3    2013 Long Term Incentive Plan(6)
10.4    Forms of Agreement Under 2013 Long Term Incentive Plan(6)
10.5    Employment Agreement Between xG Technology, Inc. and John Coleman(6)
10.6    Loan Documents Between xG Technology and MB Technology Holdings, LLC(6)
10.7    Form of Securities Subscription Agreement(6)
10.8    Form of Bridge Loan Documents(6)
10.9    2004 Option Plan(6)
10.10   2005 Option Plan(6)
10.11   2006 Option Plan(6)
10.12   2007 Option Plan(6)
10.13   2009 Option Plan(6)
10.14   Forms of Award Documents under 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, and 2009 Option Plans(6)
10.15   Sunrise Office Lease(6)
10.16   Treco Documents(6)
10.17   Mats Wennberg Consulting Agreement(6)
10.18   Mats Wennberg Warrant Agreement(6)
10.19   MBC Agreement(6)
10.20   Care21 Agreement(6)
10.21   Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Choctaw dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.22     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Electra dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.23     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Haxtun dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.24     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and MoKanDial dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.25     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and NEFCOM dated September 4, 2012(7)

II-4


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 
Exhibit Number   Description of Exhibit
10.26     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Tatum dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.27     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Walnut Hill dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.28     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Choctaw dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.29     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Electra dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.30     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Haxtun dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.31     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and MoKanDial dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.32     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and NEFCOM dated September 4, 2012(7)
10.33     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Tatum dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.34     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and TelAtlantic Equipment Purchase Agreement dated January 18, 2013(7)
10.35     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Walnut Hill dated November 24, 2012(7)
23.1      Consent of Friedman LLP
23.2†     Consent of Robinson Brog Leinwand Greene Genovese & Gluck P.C. (Reference is made to Exhibit 5.1)
24.1      Power of Attorney (set forth on the signature page of the Registration Statement)
101.INS*    XBRL Instance Document
101.SCH*   XBRL Taxonomy Schema
101.CAL*   XBRL Taxonomy Calculation Linkbase
101.DEF*   XBRL Taxonomy Definition Linkbase
101.LAB*   XBRL Taxonomy Label Linkbase
101.PRE*   XBRL Taxonomy Presentation Linkbase

To be filed by amendment.
* XBRL (Extensible Business Reporting Language) information is furnished and not filed or a part of a registration statement or prospectus for purposes of Sections 11 or 12 of the Securities Act, is deemed not filed for purposes of Section 18 of the Exchange Act, and otherwise is not subject to liability under these sections.
(1) Filed as an Exhibit on Form S-1 with the SEC on October 23, 2013.
(2) Filed as an Exhibit on Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q with the SEC on August 30, 2013.
(3) Filed as an Exhibit on Form S-1/A with the SEC on May 21, 2013.
(4) Filed as an Exhibit on Current Report to Form 8-K with the SEC on August 19, 2013.
(5) Filed as an Exhibit on Form S-1/A with the SEC on November 6, 2013.
(6) Filed as an Exhibit on Form S-1 with the SEC on March 7, 2013.
(7) Filed as an Exhibit on Form S-1/A with the SEC on April 3, 2013.

II-5


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(b) Financial Statement Schedules

No financial statement schedules have been provided because the information is not required or is shown either in the financial statements or the notes thereto.

ITEM 17. Undertakings.

The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the underwriting certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that:

(1) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.
(2) For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.
(3) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act, each prospectus filed pursuant to Rule 424(b) as part of a registration statement relating to an offering, other than registration statements relying on Rule 430B or other than prospectuses filed in reliance on Rule 430A (230.430A of this chapter), shall be deemed to be part of and included in the registration statement as of the date it is first used after effectiveness. Provided, however, that no statement made in a registration statement or prospectus that is part of the registration statement or made in a document incorporated or deemed incorporated by reference into the registration statement or prospectus that is part of the registration statement will, as to a purchaser with a time of contract of sale prior to such first use, supersede or modify any statement that was made in the registration statement or prospectus that was part of the registration statement or made in any such document immediately prior to such date of first use.

II-6


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the Registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized in the City of Sarasota, State of Florida, on April 3, 2014.

xG TECHNOLOGY, INC.
(Registrant)

By: /s/ John C. Coleman
John C. Coleman
Chief Executive Officer
(Principal Executive Officer)

POWER OF ATTORNEY:  KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that each individual whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints John C. Coleman and Roger G. Branton, and each of them, his or her true and lawful attorneys-in-fact and agents with full power of substitution, for him or her and in his or her name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments (including post-effective amendments) to this Registration Statement, and to sign any registration statement for the same offering covered by the Registration Statement that is to be effective upon filing pursuant to Rule 462(b) promulgated under the Securities Act, and all post-effective amendments thereto, and to file the same, with all exhibits thereto and all documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto said attorneys-in-fact and agents, and each of them, full power and authority to do and perform each and every act and thing requisite and necessary to be done in and about the premises, as fully to all intents and purposes as he or she might or could do in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all that said attorneys-in-fact and agents or any of them, or his, her or their substitute or substitutes, may lawfully do or cause to be done or by virtue hereof.

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Registration Statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates stated.

   
Signature   Title   Date
/s/ John C. Coleman
John C. Coleman
  Chief Executive Officer and Director
(Principal Executive Officer)
  April 3, 2014
/s/ Roger G. Branton
Roger G. Branton
  Chief Financial Officer
(Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)
  April 3, 2014
/s/ George Schmitt
George Schmitt
  Chairman of the Board   April 3, 2014
/s/ Richard L. Mooers
Richard L. Mooers
  Director   April 3, 2014
/s/ Gary Cuccio
Gary Cuccio
  Director   April 3, 2014
/s/ Raymond M. Sidney
Raymond M. Sidney
  Director   April 3, 2014
/s/ Kenneth Hoffman
Kenneth Hoffman
  Director   April 3, 2014
/s/ Larry Townes
Larry Townes
  Director   April 3, 2014


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

EXHIBIT INDEX

 
Exhibit Number   Description of Exhibit
 1.1†   Form of Underwriting Agreement
3.1   Amended & Restated Certificate of Incorporation(1)
3.2   Amended & Restated Bylaws(2)
4.1   Form of Common Stock Certificate of the Registrant(3)
4.2   Form of Warrant Agreement by and between the Registrant and Continental Stock Transfer & Trust Company and Form of Warrant Certificate for the offering closed July 24, 2013 and August 19, 2013(4)
4.3   Form of Underwriters’ Warrant for the offering closed July 24, 2013(1)
4.4   Form of Underwriters’ Warrant for the offering closed November 18, 2013(5)
 5.1†   Opinion of Robinson Brog Leinwand Greene Genovese & Gluck P.C.
10.1    Form of Customer Documents Purchase Agreements, and Distribution Agreement(6)
10.2    Form of Indemnification Agreement(6)
10.3    2013 Long Term Incentive Plan(6)
10.4    Forms of Agreement Under 2013 Long Term Incentive Plan(6)
10.5    Employment Agreement Between xG Technology, Inc. and John Coleman(6)
10.6    Loan Documents Between xG Technology and MB Technology Holdings, LLC(6)
10.7    Form of Securities Subscription Agreement(6)
10.8    Form of Bridge Loan Documents(6)
10.9    2004 Option Plan(6)
10.10   2005 Option Plan(6)
10.11   2006 Option Plan(6)
10.12   2007 Option Plan(6)
10.13   2009 Option Plan(6)
10.14   Forms of Award Documents under 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, and 2009 Option Plans(6)
10.15   Sunrise Office Lease(6)
10.16   Treco Documents(6)
10.17   Mats Wennberg Consulting Agreement(6)
10.18   Mats Wennberg Warrant Agreement(6)
10.19   MBC Agreement(6)
10.20   Care21 Agreement(6)
10.21   Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Choctaw dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.22   Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Electra dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.23   Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Haxtun dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.24   Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and MoKanDial dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.25   Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and NEFCOM dated September 4, 2012(7)
10.26     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Tatum dated November 24, 2012(7)


 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 
Exhibit Number   Description of Exhibit
10.27     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Walnut Hill dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.28     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Choctaw dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.29     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Electra dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.30     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Haxtun dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.31     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and MoKanDial dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.32     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and NEFCOM dated September 4, 2012(7)
10.33     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Tatum dated November 24, 2012(7)
10.34     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and TelAtlantic Equipment Purchase Agreement dated January 18, 2013(7)
10.35     Engineering Services Agreement between xG Technology, Inc. and Walnut Hill dated November 24, 2012(7)
23.1      Consent of Friedman LLP
23.2†     Consent of Robinson Brog Leinwand Greene Genovese & Gluck P.C. (Reference is made to Exhibit 5.1)
24.1      Power of Attorney (set forth on the signature page of the Registration Statement)
101.INS*    XBRL Instance Document
101.SCH*   XBRL Taxonomy Schema
101.CAL*   XBRL Taxonomy Calculation Linkbase
101.DEF*   XBRL Taxonomy Definition Linkbase
101.LAB*   XBRL Taxonomy Label Linkbase
101.PRE*   XBRL Taxonomy Presentation Linkbase

To be filed by amendment.
* XBRL (Extensible Business Reporting Language) information is furnished and not filed or a part of a registration statement or prospectus for purposes of Sections 11 or 12 of the Securities Act is deemed not filed for purposes of Section 18 of the Exchange Act, and otherwise is not subject to liability under these sections.
(1) Filed as an Exhibit on Form S-1 with the SEC on October 23, 2013.
(2) Filed as an Exhibit on Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q with the SEC on August 30, 2013.
(3) Filed as an Exhibit on Form S-1/A with the SEC on May 21, 2013.
(4) Filed as an Exhibit on Current Report to Form 8-K with the SEC on August 19, 2013.
(5) Filed as an Exhibit on Form S-1/A with the SEC on November 6, 2013.
(6) Filed as an Exhibit on Form S-1 with the SEC on March 7, 2013.
(7) Filed as an Exhibit on Form S-1/A with the SEC on April 3, 2013.